Nortel 1000 E Communication Server Installation and Commissioning

Title page

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0

Communication Server 1000E

Installation and Commissioning

Document Number: NN43041-310

Document Release: 04.06

Date: November 2011

Copyright © 2004-2011, Nortel Networks. All rights reserved.

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing. NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR

CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

14

Page 3 of 484

Contents

List of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

New in this release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

128-port DSP daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Getting help from the Nortel Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . 27

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code . . . . 28

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

System information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Conventions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Related information .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 4 of 484

Contents

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Lifting system equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Handling circuit cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Installing telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using telephones .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Installation summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Communication Server 1000 task flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Installation tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Supported configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

CS 1000E Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Choosing the slot location for a Server card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

CP PM and CP DC Serial Data Interface (SDI) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

CP PM card dip switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Server keycode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Readiness checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

CS 1000E Gateway Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

MGC card DSP daughterboards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

TDM only configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Adding ELAN routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

MC32S Voice Gateway Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Voice Gateway Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Media Gateway Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Media Gateway Expander .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Contents

Page 5 of 484

Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Serial port connectivity .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

MGU DIP switch settings .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Rear components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MG1010 Rack Mount Kit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Media Gateway 1000 Standard 19-inch Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Layer 2 Ethernet swtich .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

MRV Terminal Server .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

19-inch rack .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

System cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Miscellaneous system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Uninterruptible Power Supply .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server . . .

91

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Supported configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Co-res CS and SS based CS 1000E system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Co-res CS and SS based Branch Office Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . 93

Communication Server 1000E TDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

High Availability (HA) support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

NTM427CBE6 CP PM upgrade kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

CP PM Media Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

CP MG, CP DC, and COTS2 media storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Software applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Secure File Transfer Protocol .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Joining and leaving the UCM security domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 6 of 484

Contents

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment

Controller (MG XPEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Functional description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Loadware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Network Connection and Dual Homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Adding ELAN routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Installing the MG XPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Media Gateway display type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rack-mounting the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Lifting system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Guidelines for component placement in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000, Media Gateway 1010, or

Media Gateway Expander .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Installing system grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Installing a ground bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel . . 147

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels . . 149

Grounding a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Grounding other rack-mounted components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Grounding equipment in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Contents

Page 7 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware . . . 153

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Connecting Server 0 to Server 1 (CP PIV, CP PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Connecting co-located Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Installing Server cards and Gateway Controller cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Gateway Controller installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Installing a Media Gateway Controller DSP Daughterboard . . . . . . 159

Configuring the Gateway Controller (mgcsetup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Installing the Server card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Cabling the cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Cabling the MGC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

MGC Ethernet Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Cabling the CP MG card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Connecting the Servers to a Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Cabling the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter onto a Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the ELAN subnet .. . . . . 171

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the TLAN subnet .. . . . . 172

Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Installing software on the CS 1000E . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Software Install Kit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Creating a Call Processor software Compact Flash card . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Reconfigure I/O ports and call registers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Testing the Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Install the software on the second Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configuring primary and secondary call server IP addresses . . . . . 207

Verifying Call Server 0 is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 8 of 484

Contents

Making the system redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Complete the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configuring the Media Gateway zone and IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Initial configuration of the Gateway Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Rebooting the MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Loadware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Installing a Signaling Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Signaling Server task flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Supported hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IP subnet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

ISP1100 migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Installing Signaling Server hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Installing Signaling Server software .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Configuring an IP telephony node . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Before you begin .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configuring MS Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Logging in to Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files . . . . 244

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . 248

Performing a datadump .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Configuring the CS 1000E

Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configuring login IDs and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Contents

Page 9 of 484

Enabling the multi-user option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Checking PTY status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Bandwidth Management Zones .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Logging in to Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files . . . . 268

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . 269

Performing a datadump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Port blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Configuring the Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Configuring the Media Gateway in Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Configuring conference TDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Configuring DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway channels . . . . . . . . . 284

MG XPEC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

CP MG considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal

Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Configuring a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Configuring the Terminal Server IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Telnet to CS 1000E COM port from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Configuring an rlogin port for various applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem . . . . . 297

CS 1000E COM port types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 10 of 484

Contents

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports . . . . . . . . . . 299

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Setting the TTY terminal port .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Traditional terminal SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

CS 1000E CP PM Call Server serial port connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

MG 1000E SDI connection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

MGC serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Voice Gateway Media Card SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card . . . 307

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Circuit card options .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Digital trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Connecting a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Universal Trunk card connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

E&M Trunk card connections .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Trunk connections (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Trunk connections (UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Verifying trunk functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Installing and configuring a

Voice Gateway Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Configuring a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Adding a card to an IP telephony node .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager .. . . . . . 345

Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Saving configuration changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Contents

Page 11 of 484

Installing a Compact Flash (CF) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Installing a card in a Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Verifying a card .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Disabling a card .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Disabling a card unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Enabling a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Enabling a card unit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Verifying functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Installing the Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . 371

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Terminal block requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones . . . . . 381

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Package components for the Nortel IP Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Connectivity and power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Installation and configuration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

VoIP bandwidth management zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Configuring virtual superloops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Configuring a Nortel IP Phone using LD 11 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone

Installer passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Configuring the Nortel IP Phone boot parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration . 411

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 12 of 484

Contents

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters . 414

Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters . . . . . . . . . . 416

Using Set-Based Installation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Installing and configuring on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Verifying Nortel IP Phone functionality .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Displaying registered IP Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Upgrading firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Circuit cards features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expansion .

430

Cross-connecting telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Connecting a telephone without a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Connecting an off-premise telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Connecting an attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Installing and cross-connecting a

Power Fail Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Installing and connecting a third-party PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a PFTU . . . . . . . 446

Connecting a trunk to a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Contents

Page 13 of 484

Basic system telephony configuration . . . . . . . . . 453

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Basic system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

TN assignment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 .. . . . . . . . . 460

Installing an alarm through QUA6 PFTU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Implementation summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Appendix A: Supported cabling options. . . . . . . . 469

Appendix B: Supported media and memory sizes. 485

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 14 of 484

Contents

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

22

Page 15 of 484

List of Procedures

Procedure 1

Replacing the NTC315 air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Procedure 2

Installing the new I/O panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Procedure 3

Cabling the MG XPEC motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Procedure 4

Cabling the MG XPEC daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Procedure 5

Installing the MG XPEC pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Procedure 6

Installing the new card slot label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Procedure 7

Installing the Ethernet cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Procedure 8

Installing the XSM cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Procedure 9

Installing the Clock Reference cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Procedure 10

Preparing IPE module for configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Procedure 11

Configuring the MG XPEC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Procedure 12

Removing the cover of a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander 130

Procedure 13

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000 or Media Gateway Expander . 132

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 16 of 484

List of Procedures

Procedure 14

Removing the cover of a Media Gateway 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Procedure 15

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Procedure 16

Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Procedure 17

Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Procedure 18

Grounding Media Gateways powered by the same electrical panel . . . 147

Procedure 19

Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels . . . 149

Procedure 20

Grounding a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Procedure 21

Grounding equipment in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Procedure 22

Connecting co-located Call Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Procedure 23

Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Procedure 24

Installing the MGC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Procedure 25

Installing the CP MG card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Procedure 26

Installing a DSP Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Procedure 27

Configuring the Gateway Controller (mgcsetup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Procedure 28

Installing the Server card (CP PM, CP DC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Procedure 29

Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter . . . . . . . . . . 170

Procedure 30

Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Procedure 31

Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

List of Procedures

Page 17 of 484

Procedure 32

Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Procedure 33

Creating a bootable Call Server software CF card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Procedure 34

Installing the software on the Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Procedure 35

Reconfiguring I/O ports and call registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Procedure 36

Testing the Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Procedure 37

Installing the software on the second Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Procedure 38

Configuring primary and secondary call server IP addresses . . . . . . . 207

Procedure 39

Making the system redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Procedure 40

Testing Call Server 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Procedure 41

Switching call processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Procedure 42

Testing Call Server 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Procedure 43

Switching call processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Procedure 44

Performing a data dump to backup the customer database: . . . . . . . . 218

Procedure 45

Configuring the Gateway Controller on the Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Procedure 46

Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Procedure 47

Launching Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Procedure 48

Importing an existing node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Procedure 49

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration . . . . . . . . 244

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 18 of 484

List of Procedures

Procedure 50

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in

Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Procedure 51

Performing a datadump using Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Procedure 52

Configuring login IDs and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Procedure 53

Enabling the multi-user option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Procedure 54

Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Procedure 55

Checking PTY status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Procedure 56

Launching Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Procedure 57

Importing an existing node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Procedure 58

Performing a datadump using Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Procedure 59

Configuring the Media Gateway (Element Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Procedure 60

Configure conference TDS (CLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Procedure 61

Configuring conference TDS (Element Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Procedure 62

Configure DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway channels (CLI) . . . . . . . 284

Procedure 63

Connecting a Terminal Server to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Procedure 64

Configure IP address for the Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Procedure 65

Running telnet from PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Procedure 66

Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet Terminal Server . . . . 293

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

List of Procedures

Page 19 of 484

Procedure 67

Configuring an rlogin port for various applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Procedure 68

Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem . . . . . 297

Procedure 69

Connecting SDI ports on the Media Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Procedure 70

Connecting a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Procedure 71

Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . 340

Procedure 72

Adding voice gateway channels using Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Procedure 73

Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Procedure 74

Installing the CF card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Procedure 75

Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Procedure 76

Manually assigning the MC32S card an IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Procedure 77

Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Procedure 78

Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels . 361

Procedure 79

Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units . . . . . . . . . . 362

Procedure 80

Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card . . . 365

Procedure 81

Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager . . . . . 365

Procedure 82

Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager . 366

Procedure 83

Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager . . . . . 367

Procedure 84

Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager . . 368

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 20 of 484

List of Procedures

Procedure 85

Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Procedure 86

Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame (UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Procedure 87

Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Procedure 88

Configuring virtual superloops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Procedure 89

Configuring the IP Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Procedure 90

Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary

IP Telephone Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Procedure 91

Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Procedure 92

Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration . 411

Procedure 93

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters 414

Procedure 94

Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters . . . . . . . . . . 416

Procedure 95

Using Set-Based Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Procedure 96

Configuring the IP Softphone 2050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Procedure 97

Installing the USB Headset Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Procedure 98

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Procedure 99

Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Procedure 100

Cross-connecting telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Procedure 101

Connecting a telephone without a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

List of Procedures

Page 21 of 484

Procedure 102

Connecting an off-premise telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Procedure 103

Connecting an attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Procedure 104

Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Procedure 105

Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a PFTU . . . . . . . . 448

Procedure 106

Connecting a Trunk to a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Procedure 107

Configuring the basic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Procedure 108

Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 . . . . . . . . . . 460

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 22 of 484

List of Procedures

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

26

Page 23 of 484

New in this release

Features

The following sections describe new features or hardware for

Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0.

Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card

The Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card is introduced. The hardware for the CP MG card consists of integrating a Common Processor, a

Gateway Controller, and non-removable Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources into a single card for use in a Communication Server 1000E system.

The CP MG card is available in two versions:

• NTDW56BAE6 - CP MG card with 32 DSP ports

• NTDW59BAE6 - CP MG card with 128 DSP ports

The CP MG card provides improvements in port density and cost reductions by functioning as a Call Server or Application Server and a Gateway

Controller with DSP resources while occupying slot 0 in a Media Gateway.

The CP MG card requires the Linux Base Operating System, and supports the

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server, and CS 1000E TDM configurations. The CP MG card does not support the standard or high availability Call Server configuration.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 24 of 484

New in this release

Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC) card

The Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC) card is introduced. The CP DC is a Server card for use in a Communication Server 1000E system. The

CP DC card contains a dual core AMD processor and upgraded components which can provide improvements in processing power and speed over existing Server cards.

The CP DC card is available in two versions:

• NTDW53AAE6 - single slot metal faceplate CP DC card.

• NTDW54AAE6 - double slot metal faceplate CP DC card.

The CP DC card requires the Linux Base Operating System, and supports

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server, or stand-alone Signaling

Server configurations. The CP DC card does not support the standard or high availability Call Server configuration.

128-port DSP daughterboard

The 128-port Digital Signal Processor (DSP) daughterboard (DB-128) for the

Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card is introduced. An MGC card populated with one NTDW78 DB-128 can provide 128 DSP ports.

The CS 1000E Peripheral Rate Interface (PRI) Media Gateway (PRI

Gateway) can support a MGC card populated with two DB-128 for a maximum of 256 DSP ports.

The Extended Media Gateway PRI (MGP) package 418 is required to support

MGC cards populated with two DB-96 or two DB-128.

Revision History

November 2011

Standard 04.06. This document is up-issued to remove legacy content that is no longer applicable to or supported by Communication Server 1000 systems.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

New in this release

Page 25 of 484

May 2011

Standard 04.05. This document is up-issued to include an update to the

Readiness checklist.

April 2011

Standard 04.04. This document is up-issued to include an update to the

Configuring the Gateway Controller procedure.

March 2011

Standard 04.03. This document is up-issued to support the Communication

Server 1000 Release 7.0.

June 2010

June 2010

October 2009

September 2009

Standard 03.04. This document is up-issued to support the Media Gateway

1010.

June 2009

Standard 03.05. This document is up-issued to support the Media Gateway

Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card.

Standard 03.03. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 6.0.

May 2009

Standard 04.01. This document is issued to support Communication Server

1000 Release 7.0.

Standard 03.02. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 6.0.

May 2009

Standard 04.02. This document is up-issued to update the CS 1000E task flow graphic and to include CP PM version 2 content.

Standard 03.01. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 6.0.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 26 of 484

New in this release

February 2008

Standard 02.02. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 5.5.

December 2007

Standard 02.01. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 5.5.

June 2007

Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued with corrections from CR

Q001650800 and Q001662089-01.

June 2007

Standard 01.03. This document is up-issued with corrections from CR

Q001646756.

May 2007

Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued with corrections from CR

Q001646756.

May 2007

Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 5.0. This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired: Communication Server 1000E:

Installation and Configuration (553-3041-210).

July 2006

Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued with corrections from CR

Q001324850.

August 2005

Standard 2.00. This document is issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 4.5.

September 2004

Standard 1.00. This document is issued for Communication Server 1000

Release 4.5.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

28

Page 27 of 484

How to get help

This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel Web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel

Technical Support Web site: www.nortel.com/support

This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:

• download software, documentation, and product bulletins

• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues

• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for

Nortel equipment

• open and manage technical support cases

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions

Center

If you don’t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support

Web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 28 of 484

How to get help

Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region: www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing

Code

To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express

Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to: www.nortel.com/erc

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

30

Page 29 of 484

Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site

The content of this documentation was current at the time the product was released. To check for updates to the latest documentation and software for

Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0, click one of the links below.

Latest Software

Latest Documentation

Takes you directly to the Nortel page for CS 1000 Release 7.0 software.

Takes you directly to the Nortel page for CS 1000 Release 7.0 documentation.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 30 of 484

Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

36

Page 31 of 484

System information

This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your

Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area.

Subject

This document provides the information necessary to install and configure a

Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000E system.

WARNING

Before a CS 1000E system can be installed, a network assessment must be performed and the network must be

VoIP-ready.

If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met, the system will not operate properly.

For information on the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP, refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP

(NN43001-260).

Note on legacy products and releases

This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 software. For more information on legacy products and releases, click the

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 32 of 484

System information

Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page: www.nortel.com

Applicable systems

This document applies to the Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) system.

Intended audience

This document is intended for individuals who install and configure new

Communication Server 1000E systems.

Note: When installing software, memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.

Conventions

In this document, the CS 1000E system is referred to generically as system.

The following systems are referred to generically as Small system:

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

• Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

• Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S)

The following hardware is referred to generically as Media Gateway:

• Meridian 1 Option 11C Mini Chassis (NTDK91) and Expander chassis

(NTDK92)

• Meridian 1 Option 11C Cabinet (NTAK11)

• MG 1000E Chassis (NTDU14) and Expander chassis (NTDU15)

• MG 1010 Chassis (NTC310)

• IPE module (NT8D37) with MG XPEC card (NTDW20)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System information

Page 33 of 484

The following cards are referred to generically as Gateway Controller:

• Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card (NTDW60 or NTDW98)

• Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card (NTDW56 or

NTDW59)

• Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card (NTDW20)

In this document the following hardware platforms are referred to generically as Server.

• Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV)

• Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP PM)

• Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG)

• Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC)

• Commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) servers

— IBM x306m server (COTS1)

— HP DL320 G4 server (COTS1)

— IBM x3350 server (COTS2)

— Dell R300 server (COTS2)

In this document, the generic term COTS refers to all COTS servers. The term

COTS1 or COTS2 refers to the specific servers in the preceding list.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 34 of 484

System information

The following table shows CS 1000 Release 7.0 supported roles for common hardware platforms.

Table 1

Hardware platform supported roles

Hardware platforms

CP PIV

CP PM

CP DC

CP MG

MGC

MG XPEC

COTS1

COTS2

VxWorks

Server Linux Server

no no no no yes yes no no no no yes yes (see note) no no yes yes

Co-res CS and SS

no no no yes no yes yes yes (see note)

Gateway

Controller

yes yes no no no no no yes (see note)

Note: The CP MG card functions as the Co-resident Call Server and

Signaling Server, and the Gateway Controller while occupying Slot 0 in a Media Gateway.

Related information

This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

NTPs

The following NTPs are referenced in this document:

• Converging the Data Network with VoIP (NN43001-260)

• ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(NN43001-301)

• Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System information

Page 35 of 484

•

Communication Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering

(NN43041-220)

• IP Peer Networking: Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-313)

• Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125)

• ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(NN43001-318)

• Features and Services (NN43001-106)

• Software Input/Output: Administration (NN43001-611)

• Element Manager: System Administration (NN43001-632)

• Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125)

• Telephones and Consoles: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43001-567)

• IP Phones: Description, Installation, and Operation (NN43001-368)

• Software Input/Output: Maintenance (NN43001-711)

• Communication Server 1000E: Maintenance (NN43041-700)

• ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-717)

• ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718)

• Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server Fundamentals

(NN43001-509)

• Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-315)

•

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade

NTPs (NN43021-458 – NN43021-475)

Other documentation

The following documentation is referenced in this document:

• Nordex BIX documentation

• Krone documentation

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 36 of 484

System information

Online

To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page: www.nortel.com

CD-ROM

To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer representative.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

40

Page 37 of 484

Safety instructions

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Lifting system equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Handling circuit cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Installing telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Introduction

Safety issues associated with the installation of a Communication Server

1000E (CS 1000E) are identified in this section. To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the safety instructions before handling the equipment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the safety instructions in this chapter could result in personal injury.

CAUTION — Damage to Equipment

Failure to follow the safety instructions in this chapter could result in damage to equipment.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 38 of 484

Safety instructions

Lifting system equipment

Care should be exercised when lifting system components. If necessary, get assistance to lift a component or install a component in a rack. The weight of

the system component can be found in the component profiles in “System components” on page 47

.

Before lifting or installing a component:

• Ensure that the planned location and the route to that location are free of obstacles and debris.

• Determine the weight of the components (see component profiles in

“System components” on page 47 ).

• Get help with heavy components or components that are to be placed in the upper section of a rack.

Handling circuit cards

CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES

Static electricity can damage circuit cards. Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit cards or their components.

Follow these precautions when handling circuit cards:

1

Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors, transformers, or similar machinery.

2

Handle cards by the edges only. Do not touch the contacts or components.

3

Set cards on a protective antistatic bag. If an antistatic bag is not available, hold the card or set it in a card slot unseated.

4

Store cards in protective packing.

5

Do not stack cards on top of each other unless they are packaged.

6

Wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on the equipment.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Safety instructions

Page 39 of 484

Installing telephones

Follow these safety instructions when installing telephone equipment:

• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

• Never install a telephone jack in wet locations unless the jack is designed for wet locations.

• Never touch an uninsulated telephone wire or terminal unless the telephone line is disconnected at the network interface.

• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Using telephones

These safety precautions are intended to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury. Always follow these basic safety precautions when using telephone equipment:

• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

• Before you clean a telephone, remove the plug from the wall outlet. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

• Do not use the telephone near water (for example, near a tub or sink).

• Do not place the telephone on a piece of furniture that is unstable. The telephone can fall, causing serious damage to the telephone.

• Slots in the Media Gateway and the telephone are for ventilation. These slots protect the equipment from overheating. Never block or cover these slots.

• Never block the openings on a telephone by placing it on a surface like a bed, sofa, or rug. Never place a telephone near or over a radiator or heat register. Do not place it in a built-in installation, unless there is correct ventilation.

• Only operate a telephone from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply, check with your distributor.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 40 of 484

Safety instructions

• Some equipment has a three-wire grounding plug. This type of plug has a third grounding pin. As a safety feature, the plug only fits into an isolated ground outlet. If you cannot insert the plug completely into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace the outlet.

• Some equipment has a polarized line plug. This type of plug has one blade wider than the other. As a safety feature, this plug fits into the power outlet one way. If you cannot insert the plug completely into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug still does not fit, contact your electrician to replace the outlet.

• Do not place objects on the power cord. Do not locate the product where persons can walk on the plug.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as fire or electrical shock can result.

• Never push objects of any kind into the telephone through the slots. The objects can come in contact with dangerous voltage points. Also, parts can short out, causing the risk of fire or electrical shock.

• Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not disassemble a telephone product.

• Remove the telephone plug from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified personnel if:

— the power supply cord or plug is damaged or worn

— liquid has spilled into the telephone

— the telephone has been exposed to rain or water

— the telephone has been dropped or damaged

— the product shows a distinct change in performance

— the telephone does not function correctly under normal operating conditions

• Avoid using a telephone (except a type without a cord) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the area of the leak.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

46

Page 41 of 484

Installation summary

Contents

Introduction

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Communication Server 1000 task flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Installation tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

WARNING

Before a CS 1000E system can be installed, a network assessment must be performed and the network must be

VoIP-ready.

If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met, the system will not operate properly.

For information on the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP, refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP

(NN43001-260).

Before undertaking the installation, review the chapter entitled “Safety instructions” on page 37 .

See “System components” on page 47 to review the profiles of the key system

components. For information on the models of telephones compatible with

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 42 of 484

Installation summary

the CS 1000E system, see “Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones” on page 381

.

Communication Server 1000 task flow

This section provides a high-level task flow for the installation or upgrade of a Communication Server 1000E High Availability system. The task flow indicates the recommended sequence of events to follow when configuring a system and provides the NTP number that contains the detailed procedures required for the task.

For more information refer to the following NTPs, which are referenced in

Figure 1 on page 43

:

• Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-315)

• Communication Server 1000E: Installation and Commissioning

(NN43041-310)

• Communication Server 1000E Software Upgrade Procedures

(NN43041-458)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 1

Communication Server 1000E task flow

Installation summary

Page 43 of 484

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 44 of 484

Installation summary

Installation tasks

Table 2 lists the tasks involved with the installation of a CS 1000E system.

Table 2

List of required installation tasks (Part 1 of 2)

Task

Rack-mounting the components

Installing system grounds

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Installing Signaling Server software

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal

Server

Logging in to Element Manager

Installing and configuring a

Voice Gateway Media Card

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Configuring an IP telephony node

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Installing and cross-connecting a

Power Fail Transfer Unit

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Go to page

127

143

153

175

231

299

287

263

337

371

233

427

381

307

439

459

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installation summary

Page 45 of 484

Table 2

List of required installation tasks (Part 2 of 2)

Task

Basic system telephony configuration

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database

Go to page

453

465

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 46 of 484

Installation summary

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

90

Page 47 of 484

System components

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CS 1000E Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Readiness checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

CS 1000E Gateway Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

MC32S Voice Gateway Media Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Media Gateway Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Layer 2 Ethernet swtich. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

MRV Terminal Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

19-inch rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

System cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Miscellaneous system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Uninterruptible Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Introduction

The Communication Server 1000E system supportsvarious configurations which can run on VxWorks or Linux Operating Systems. For information

about supported hardware platform roles, see Table 1: “Hardware platform supported roles” on page 34 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 48 of 484

System components

Supported configurations

Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 supports the following system configurations:

• CS 1000E Standard Availability (non redundant)

• CS 1000E High Availability (redundant)

• CS 1000E Cabinet option

• CS 1000E Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server (Co-res CS and

SS)

• CS 1000E TDM

• CS 1000E High Scalability

CS 1000E Standard Availability (non redundant)

The CS 1000E Standard Availability system consists of the following components:

• Call Server

• Signaling Server

• Voice Gateway Media Card (optional)

• Gateway Controller with DSP resources

• Media Gateway

•

Media Gateway Expander (optional)

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

MRV Terminal Server (optional)

•

System cables

Note: You must order the power cord specified for your region.

The system uses the following customer-supplied components:

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

19-inch rack

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 49 of 484

• Shielded straight thru Ethernet cables

•

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

CS 1000E High Availability (redundant)

The CS 1000E High Availability system consists of the following components:

• Dual CP PIV or CP PM Call Servers

• Dual Signaling Servers

• Voice Gateway Media cards (optional)

• Gateway Controller with DSP resources

• Media Gateway

•

Media Gateway Expander (optional)

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

MRV Terminal Server (optional)

•

System cables

Note: You must order the power cord specified for your region

The system uses the following customer-supplied components:

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

19-inch rack

• Shielded straight thru Ethernet cables

•

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

CS 1000E Cabinet option

The CS 1000E Cabinet system consists of the following components:

• Single or Dual Call Servers

• Single or Dual Signaling Servers

• Voice Gateway Media cards (optional)

• Gateway Controller with DSP resources

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 50 of 484

System components

• Media Gateway

•

Media Gateway Expander (optional)

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

MRV Terminal Server (optional)

•

System cables

Note: You must order the power cord specified for your region

The system uses the following customer-supplied components:

• Layer 2 Ethernet switch

•

19-inch rack

• Shielded straight thru Ethernet cables

•

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

Note: For all configurations, a COTS Signaling Server may be an option.

CS 1000E Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

For information about the Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

configuration, see “Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server” on page 91 .

CS 1000E TDM

For information about the CS 1000E TDM configuration, see “TDM only configuration” on page 58

.

CS 1000E High Scalability

For information about the CS 1000E High Scalability system, see

Communication Server 1000E Planning and Engineering - High Scalability

Solutions (NN43041-221) and Communication Server 1000E High

Scalability Installation and Commissioning (NN43041-312).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 51 of 484

CS 1000E Servers

Communication Server 1000E systems can be deployed on various hardware platforms and in various configurations. Communication Server 1000

Release 7.0 supports the following Servers:

• Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV)

• Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP PM)

• Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG)

• Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC)

• Commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) servers

— IBM x306m server (COTS1)

— HP DL320 G4 server (COTS1)

— IBM x3350 server (COTS2)

— Dell R300 server (COTS2)

The CP PIV and CP PM server platforms support VxWorks-based Standard

Availability, High Availability, and Cabinet configurations.

The CP PM, CP DC, and COTS server platforms support the stand-alone

Linux-based Signaling Server configuration.

The CP PM, CP MG, CP DC, and COTS2 server platforms support the

Linux-based Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server (Co-res CS and

SS) configuration.

The Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card, and CP MG card Gateway

Controller platforms support the CS 1000E TDM configuration.

For more information about each type of Server hardware, see Circuit Card

Reference (NN43001-311).

Choosing the slot location for a Server card

A Media Gateway performs functions under the control of the CS 1000E

Server. In traditional CP PIV based CS 1000E systems, the Server is in a

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 52 of 484

System components separate Call Server chassis. The CP PM, CP MG, and CP DC server cards occupy one of the slots in a Media Gateway cabinet or chassis.

Note: COTS servers install in standard 19 inch racks.

Server cards connect to a Gateway Controller by Ethernet and therefore do not require backplane connectivity (other than power and slot ID). The following rules apply to the preferential placement of Server cards inthe

Media Gateway:

• The Server cards cannot be placed in slot 0 of any Media Gateway. Slot

0 is reserved for the Gateway Controller.

Note: The CP MG card functions as the Server and the Gateway

Controller while occupying Slot 0 in a Media Gateway.

• A Server card can be placed in slot 1 and higher of a Media Gateway, with the exception of slot 4 in an Meridian 1 Option 11C Mini Chassis.

The Meridian 1 Option 11C Mini Chassis slot 4 is dedicated to the 48 port DLC only.The MG 1010 provides slot 22 and 23 as dedicated Server card slots.

• If utilizing the Campus Redundancy High Availability (HA) Call Server option, place the two CP PM cards in separate Media Gateways to allow for increased survivability. HA is not supported on a Co-resident Call

Server and Signaling Server system.

Figure 2 on page 53

shows an example of a CS 1000E CP PM based system in a Media Gateway Chassis.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 2

CS 1000E CP PM based system overview

System components

Page 53 of 484

CP PM and CP DC Serial Data Interface (SDI)

The CP PM and CP DC servers feature two standard RS232 DTE serial ports, port 0 and port 1. These ports are accessible through a NTAK19 cable that attaches to the chassis or cabinet MDF port.

The TTY Settings are:

• Baud Rate: 9600

• Data bit: 8

• Stop bit: 1

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 54 of 484

System components

• Parity: None

• Flow Control: None

CP PM card dip switch settings

The CP PM card used in a VxWorks-based Server configuration must have switch S5 in position 1 to indicate that a Compact Flash (CF) card is used for the Fixed Media Drive (FMD).

The CP PM card used in a Linux-based Server configuration must have switch S5 in position 2 to indicate that a hard disk is used for the FMD.

Server keycode

Keycode files reside in /keycode directory and have different names (no name restrictions) but the same extension ‘.kcd’. The following feature packages are required:

• 368 CPP_CNI CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine

• 402 SOFT_SWITCH

• 403 IPMG

• 390 SBO Branch Office (Required only if CP PM is installed as Branch

Office)

• 410 HIGH_AVAIL High Availability (Required only if installing system as High Availability)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 55 of 484

Readiness checklist

Before installing a Server in a Communication Server 1000 system, complete the following checklist.

WARNING

Do not modify or use a supplied AC-power cord if it is not the exact type required in the region where the Signaling Server is installed and used. Be sure to replace the cord with the correct type.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 56 of 484

System components

Table 3

Readiness checklist (Part 1 of 2)

Have you:

Read all safety instructions as appropriate for your Communication Server 1000 system?

Received all equipment and peripherals?

For COTS servers:

• installation accessories for rack-mounting the server

• AC-power cord

• a DTE-DTE null modem cable (supplied)

• Linux Signaling Server software DVD for COTS servers

For Server cards:

• (CP PM only) NTM427CBE6 - CP PM Signaling Server Linux Upgrade kit, which includes:

— NTDW6102E5 - CP PM Signaling Server Hard Drive kit (Linux OS preloaded)

— NTM42703 - 2 GB Compact Flash (CF) with Linux software, 2 GB blank CF

— NTDW6109E6 - 1 GB DDR SO-DIMM memory upgrade

• NTAK19ECE6 - 2 port SDI Cable assembly kit (required for CP PM and CP DC)

• NTC325AAE6 - Serial port adapter kit (required for MG 1010 and CP MG)

• a DTE-DTE null modem cable (supplied)

Note:

Save the packaging container and packing materials in case you must ship the product.

Made sure the area meets all environmental requirements?

Checked for all power requirements?

Made sure the CP PM hardware meets all required specifications. See Appendix B for required media and memory configuration. (CP PM version 1 [NTDW61AAE5/BAE5;

NTDW66AAE5/ABE5; NTDW99AAE5/ABE5] BIOS version 18 or higher?)

Checked for correct grounding facilities?

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 57 of 484

Table 3

Readiness checklist (Part 2 of 2)

Have you:

Obtained the following:

• screwdrivers

• an ECOS 1023 POW-R-MATE or similar type of multimeter

• appropriate cable terminating tools

• a computer (maintenance terminal) to connect directly to the Signaling Server, with:

— teletype terminal (ANSI-W emulation, serial port, 9600 bps)

— a Web browser for Element Manager (configure cache settings to check for new

Web pages

— every time the browser is invoked, and to empty the cache when the browser is closed)

• a USB memory stick

Note:

Avaya recommends using the N0220961 USB memory stick for Communication

Server 1000 Release 7.0 and later. Not all USB memory sticks are supported.

Prepared the network data as suggested in Converging the Data Network with VoIP

(NN43001-260) or Communication Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering

(NN43041-220), as appropriate for your Communication Server 1000 system?

Read all safety instructions in Communication Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering

(NN43041-220), as appropriate for your Communication Server 1000 system?

CS 1000E Gateway Controllers

Each Media Gateway in a CS 1000E system requires a Gateway Controller.

The Gateway Controller provides controller functions and provides DSP resources for the Media Gateway. Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 supports the following Gateway Controllers

• Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card

• Common Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 58 of 484

System components

• Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card

Gateway Controllers do not function as a Server, with the exception of the

CP MG card. The CP MG card provides Server and Gateway Controller functions while occupying Slot 0 in a Media Gateway. All CS 1000E systems require a Server to handle call processing requests.

For more information about Gateway Controller hardware, see Circuit Card

Reference (NN43001-311).

The Small System Controller (SSC) card is no longer supported and must be replaced with a supported Gateway Controller.

MGC card DSP daughterboards

Three optional Digital Signal Processor (DSP) daughterboards (DSP DB) are available for the MGC Card.

• NTDW62 32-port DSP DB (DB-32)

• NTDW64 96-port DSP DB (DB-96)

• NTDW78 128-port DSP DB (DB-128)

The MGC card provides two expansion sites for DSP daughterboards. At least one DSP daughterboard is required on each MGC card. The DSP daughterboards provide DSP resources for connecting IP and TDM devices, eliminating the need for installing Voice Gateway Media Cards in the CS

1000E Media Gateways. However, Voice Gateway Media Cards are still supported in CS 1000E.

TDM only configuration

You can configure the MGC card or CP MG card as TDM only, eliminating the need for external network switches. This allows the system to function as a stand alone TDM system with a maximum of three Media Gateway shelves.

The mgcsetup command is modified in the MGC advanced parameters menu allowing you to configure the Gateway Controller as a TDM only system that does not require any external network gear. For more information about

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 59 of 484

mgcsetup, see Procedure 27: "Configuring the Gateway Controller

(mgcsetup)" on page 160

.

Figure 3 on page 59

shows MGC card TDM only cable connections. This allows for a maximum of three Media Gateways to be connected using only the MGC network ports. The CE, 1E and E ports form one VLAN with all ports enabled at all times. The CT, 2T and T ports form another VLAN with all ports enabled at all times. Dual homing is not supported in this configuration.

By default the MGC layer 2 switch works as in previous releases and supports dual homing.

Figure 3

MGC TDM only connections

Adding ELAN routes

You can add routes to the ELAN on the Gateway Controller. The route information is read from an XML configuration file retrieved from the Call

Server during registration. IP addresses in the list of routes are then added to the ELAN. The XML is file created on the Call Server by Element Manager.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 60 of 484

System components

MC32S Voice Gateway Media Card

The MC32S is a 32-channel Voice Gateway Media Card that provides 32

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) ports to facilitate connectivity between IP and

TDM devices.

This media card replaces the existing 32-port Voice Gateway Media Card and enables Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP) to encrypt the IP media path to and from all DSP channels on the MC32S. The MC32S also provides improved echo performance over the existing media card.

Voice Gateway Media Card

The Voice Gateway Media Card, described in Table 4 and shown in Figure 4,

connects an IP and circuit-switched device using Digital Signal Processors

(DSPs) for either line or trunk applications. The DSPs, enabled by a Voice

Gateway application, performs media transcoding between IP voice packets and circuit-switched devices.

The Voice Gateway Media Card also provides echo cancellation and compression/decompression of voice streams.

Table 4

Voice GatewayMedia Card profile (Part 1 of 2)

Property

Product Code

Power

Cooling

Description

• NTDU41DA

Media Card 32 Port IP Line 3.1/Voice Gateway

• NTDU41DB

Media Card 8 Port IP Line 3.1/Voice Gateway

• Powered through a Media Gateway or a Media

Gateway Expander.

• Provided by the Media Gateway or Media

Gateway Expander.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 61 of 484

Table 4

Voice GatewayMedia Card profile (Part 2 of 2)

Property

Connectors

(front)

Connectors

(back)

Description

• The PC Card slot can be used to deliver software or for additional storage.

• The maintenance port provides access to the card for OA&M purposes.

• The Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter provides connections to the card through the connector labelled Card 1, Card 2, Card 3, or

Card 4 that corresponds to the card location.

Note:

The software installation is performed from the back port only. The initial boot messages are available from the back port only.

•

See Figure 50 on page 170

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 62 of 484

System components

Figure 4

Voice Gateway Media Card

PC Card slot

Maintenance port

Media Gateway Chassis

The NTDU14 Media Gateway Chassis is shown in Figure 5 on page 63 and

Figure 6 on page 64

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 63 of 484

Figure 5

Front of the Media Gateway

DIP switch settings

Power status indicators

Power switch

Bulkhead connectors

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 64 of 484

System components

Figure 6

Connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Chassis

Universal AC power cord connector

Call Server to Media Gateway link

AUX

2

1

GND

DS-30X

SDI

Port

Port 2

Dect Connector

CE-MUX

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 65 of 484

Figure 7

25-pair Cable Connectors on the Media Gateway Chassis

Card 3

Card 2

Card 1

Card

4

25-pair connectors

CAUTION — Damage to Equipment

Do not block equipment ventilation openings.

Table 5

Media Gateway Chassis profile (Part 1 of 3)

Property

Product Code

Height

Description

• NTDU14

• less than 5 U (1 U = 1 3/4 inch or 4.4 cm)

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 66 of 484

System components

Table 5

Media Gateway Chassis profile (Part 2 of 3)

Property

Power

Cooling

Card slots

Description

• Power status indicator (Nortel logo) is located on the unit faceplate.

• Power cord connector is located on the right rear when viewed from the front.

• Power On/Off switch is located behind the

faceplate. See Figure 5 on page 63

.

• Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable.

• Unit is AC powered (100-240 VAC); DC is not supported.

• Forced air cooling with side-to-side air flow.

• The fans are temperature controlled. The fans run at a reduced speed at room temperature.

• Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked.

• Four usable universal card slots: 1 to 4.

• Slot 0 is reserved for the MGC.

• Slots 1 to 4 support:

— CP PM Call Server card (maximum four)

— CP PM Signaling Server card (maximum four)

— Digital Line cards (maximum four)

— Analog Line cards (maximum four)

— Analog Trunk cards (maximum four)

— Digital Trunk cards (maximum four)

— Media Cards (maximum four)

— Application cards (maximum four)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 67 of 484

Table 5

Media Gateway Chassis profile (Part 3 of 3)

Property

Connectors

(rear)

DIP switches

Description

• The 25-pair cable connectors at the back panel

(see Figure 6 on page 64 ) provide access to the

cross-connect terminal (Main Distribution Frame).

•

The AUX port (see Figure 6 on page 64

) connects a Power Failure Transfer Unit (PFTU) to the

Media Gateway.

•

The Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) (see Figure 6 on page 64

) is used with earlier version SSC which require a Media Access Unit (MAU).

•

The SDI connector (see Figure 6 on page 64 ) in

the Media Gateway provides an interface for a three-port SDI cable. For MG 1000E this cable is not used unless maintenance access using TTY0 is desired.

•

The DS-30X and CE-MUX cables (see Figure 6 on page 64

) connect the Media Gateway to the

Media Gateway Expander.

• DIP switches are available to set the ringing voltages, ringing frequencies, and message

waiting voltages. See Figure 5 on page 63 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 68 of 484

System components

Media Gateway Expander

Figure 8 on page 68 shows the Media Gateway Expander and Table 6 on page 68 describes the expander.

Figure 8

Media Gateway Expander

SLOT

10

SLOT

9

SLOT

8

SLOT

7

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8

Slot 7

553-CSE9032

Table 6

Media Gateway Expander profile (Part 1 of 3)

Property

Order Code

Height

Description

• NTDU15

• less than 5 U (1 U = 1 3/4 inch or 4.4 cm)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 69 of 484

Table 6

Media Gateway Expander profile (Part 2 of 3)

Property

Power

Cooling

Description

• Power status indicator (Nortel logo) is located on the unit’s faceplate.

• Power cord connector is located on the right rear when viewed from the front.

• Power On/Off switch is located behind the

faceplate. See Figure 5 on page 63

.

• Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable.

• Unit is AC powered (100-240 VAC); DC is not supported.

• Forced air cooling with side-to-side air flow.

• The fans are temperature controlled. The fans run at a reduced speed at room temperature.

• Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 70 of 484

System components

Table 6

Media Gateway Expander profile (Part 3 of 3)

Property

Card slots

Connectors

(rear)

Description

• Four usable universal card slots: 7 to 10. See

Figure 8 on page 68 .

• Logical slots 5 and 6 are not supported.

• Slots 7 to 10 support:

— CP PM Call Server card (maximum four)

— CP PM Signaling Server card (maximum four)

— Analog Trunk cards (maximum four)

— Analog Line cards (maximum four)

— Digital Line cards (maximum four)

— Media Cards (maximum four)

— Application cards (maximum four)

• The 25-pair cable connectors at the back of the

unit (see Figure 9 on page 71

) provide access to the cross-connect terminal (Main Distribution

Frame). A Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter can also be used.

• The AUX port connects a Power Failure Transfer

Unit (PFTU).

• The DS-30X and CE-MUX cables connect the

Media Gateway to the Media Gateway Expander.

Note:

These cables are uni-directional cables with a ferrite bead at one end that needs to be terminated on the expansion cabinet end.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 71 of 484

Figure 9

Connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Expander

Universal AC power cord connector

DS-30X

CE-MUX

C ar d

1

0

C ar d

C ar

9 d

8

Ca rd

7

25-pair connectors

Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010)

The Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) is a rack mount Media Gateway chassis that provides a larger amount of card slots than a Media Gateway Chassis with Media Gateway Expander. The CS 1000E Call Server can connect to and control a maximum of 50 MG 1010s. Each MG 1010 provides a dedicated

Gateway Controller slot, two dedicated Server card slots, and ten slots for IPE cards.

The MG 1010 is a single chassis that can provide more processing power and card capacity than a MG 1000E with Media Gateway Expander.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 72 of 484

System components

Physical description

The following sections describe the front and rear components of the

MG 1010 (NTC310).

Front components

Figure 10 on page 73

shows the Media Gateway 1010 without the front cover.

Note the following features:

• Ten IPE card slots

• Two Server card slots

• One Gateway Controller card slot

• One Media Gateway Utility (MGU) card provides LED status, ringing, message waiting voltage, dual homing Ethernet cable ports, and serial cable ports

• Eight RJ-45 Ethernet ports on front right side for cable management.

Ports interface with rear I/O panel

• One metal divider in chassis to separate MGU card, Server card, and

Gateway Controller cards from the IPE cards.

• Ethernet coupler.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 10

MG 1010 front components

System components

Page 73 of 484

Figure 11 on page 74 shows the MG 1010 with the front cover. Note the

following:

• Window to view LED status of all cards, fans, and power supplies

• Decorative cover provides additional EMC shielding

• Two locking latches in top corners of front cover

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 74 of 484

System components

Figure 11

MG 1010 front cover

Serial port connectivity

NTDW99 CP PM cards and NTDW53 CP DC cards in MG 1010 slots 22 and

23 use the MGU faceplate ports, shielded CAT5 Ethernet cables (customer supplied) and the NTC325AAE6 serial cable kit.

NTDW53 CP DC cards, NTDW99 and NTDW61 CP PM cards in a Media

Gateway Chassis, or MG 1010 slots 1-10 use the NTAK19EC 2-port SDI cable.

The NTC325AAE6 serial cable kit includes the N0211606 RJ45 to DB25

(male) adapter which is intended to connect the MG1010 to a DCE device such as a modem, and two RJ45 to DB9 (female) N0211605 adapters which have an integrated null modem and are intended to connect the MG1010 to

DTE devices such as a terminal or PC serial port. A standard UTP Ethernet cable of sufficient length must be supplied by the customer to connect the

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 75 of 484

MGU to the appropriate adapter. Pin definitions and connection details are

provided for the DB25 adapter in Table 7 and for the DB9 adapter in

Figure 12 on page 76 . The pinout for a standard DB9 RS-232 connector and

for the MGU faceplate serial ports is listed in Table 7 for reference.

Table 7

Pin definitions and connection details

1

RJ45

Pin #

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

MGC SDI

1

Signal

MGC SDI

2 & 3

Signal

CP 1 & 2

SDI 1 & 2

Signal nc

DCD

12V

GND

RD

TD nc

12V nc nc nc

GND

RD

TD nc nc

DSR

DCD

DTR

GND

RD

TD

CTS

RTS

DB25 Pin

#

6

8

20

7

3

N0211606

DB25 modem

(DCE)

Standard

DB9 serial port pin definition

2

5

4

DB9 Pin #

6

1

4

5

2

3

8

7

Description

(signal direction is from DTE’s perspective

)

Data Set

Ready (in)

Data Carrier

Detect (in)

Data

Terminal

Ready (out)

Ground

Received

Data (in)

Trasmitted

Data (out)

Clear To

Send (in)

Request To

Send (out)

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 76 of 484

System components

Figure 12

N0211605 DB9 Null Modem adapter (supplied in NTC325AAE6 cable kit)

C ar d

1

0

C ar d

C ar

9 d

8

C ard

7

Table 8

Frequency

MGU DIP switch settings

See Table 8, Table 9 on page 77 , and Table 10 on page 77 to set the MGU

DIP switch settings to set any one frequency, any one voltage level, and to enable the ring generator.

SWITCH S1

FREQUENCY

20Hz

25Hz

50Hz

S1_3

ON

OFF

OFF

S1_4

OFF

ON

OFF

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 77 of 484

Table 9

Voltage

VOLTAGE

70V

75V

80V

86V

Table 10

Ringer enable

SWITCH S1

S1_5

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

S1_6

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

S1_7

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

RINGER ENABLE

Ringer enable

Ringer disable

SWITCH S1

S1_8

ON

OFF

Table 11

S2 UV_Protect

S2 UV_PROTECT

-120

-150

Set the -150 switch to be -120 and -150 based on Table 11, Table 12 on page 78 , and Table 13 on page 78 .

OFF

ON

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 78 of 484

System components

Table 12

S4 OV_Protect

S4 OV_PROTECT

-120

-150

ON

OFF

Table 13

S3 Volt_Sel

S3 VOLT_SEL

-120

-150

OFF

ON

International power supply DIP switch settings

See the following tables for international power supply DIP switch settings:

•

Table 14 for Asic Pacific/CALA power supply DIP switch settings

•

Table 15 on page 79 for Euopean power supply DIP switch settings

•

Table 16 on page 79 for North American power supply DIP switch

settings

Table 14

Asic Pacific/CALA power supply DIP switch settings (Part 1 of 2)

Ring Frequency(Hz) Ringing Amplitude(Vrms) Message waiting Lamp(VDC)

Switch

Setting

S1_3

S1_4

S1_8

20 25 50

off

on

on

Switch

Setting

S1_5

70 75 80 86

Switch

Setting

on

S2

S3

-120 -150

on on

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 79 of 484

Table 14

Asic Pacific/CALA power supply DIP switch settings (Part 2 of 2)

S4 S1_6

S1_7

off

off off

Table 15

Euopean power supply DIP switch settings

Ring Frequency(Hz) Ringing Amplitude(Vrms) Message waiting Lamp(VDC)

Switch

Setting

S1_3

S1_4

S1_8

20 25 50

off

on

on

Switch

Setting

S1_5

S1_6

S1_7

70 75 80 86

on

off

off

Switch

Setting

S2

S3

S4

-120

off off on

-150

Table 16

North American power supply DIP switch settings

Ring Frequency(Hz)

Switch

Setting

S1_3

S1_4

S1_8

Ringing Amplitude(Vrms)

20 25 50

on

off

on

Switch

Setting

S1_5

S1_6

S1_7

70 75 80 86

off

S2

S3

off S4

on

Message waiting

Lamp(VDC)

Switch

Setting -120

off off on

-150

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 80 of 484

System components

Figure 13 on page 80

shows the dip switch settings on the board of the MGU.

Figure 13

MGU dip switch settings d

1

0

C

C ar ar d 9 d

8

C ard

7

Rear components

Figure 14 on page 81 shows the rear components of the MG 1010. Note the

following:

• Hot swappable redundant power supplies

• Hot swappable fans in a redundant N + 1 configuration for chassis cooling

• One DECT connector

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

• One AUX connector

• Ten MDF connectors

Figure 14

MG 1010 rear view

System components

Page 81 of 484

IMPORTANT!

If your MG1010 includes a cover over the Power Supply 2 connector, remove the cover by loosening the two Phillips screws and sliding the cover upwards. Once the cover is removed, tighten the two Phillips

screws again. See

Figure 14 on page 81

and

Figure 15 on page 83

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 82 of 484

System components

MG1010 Rack Mount Kit

A 19-inch Rack Mount Kit (NTTK09AA) is available for mounting a Media

Gateway 1010 chassis in a 19-inch rack. For more information, see

“Rack-mounting the components” on page 127

.

Maintenance

NTC315 air filter

Because the MG1010 is a forced air system, an air filter is mounted below the card cage. The filter is sealed to the bottom of the card guide where it provides

an additional EMI attenuation barrier. See Figure 15 on page 83

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 15

MG 1010 air filter bottom mount

System components

Page 83 of 484

You must perform a regular monthly inspection of the airfilter to avoid and airflow issues whioch may cause overheating. Follow the steps in

Procedure 1 on page 84

to replace the air filter.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 84 of 484

System components

Procedure 1

Replacing the NTC315 air filter

1

Insert a portion of the NTC315 air filter into the filter slot at the rear of the chassis. See

Figure 15 on page 83

.

2

With the levers parallel to the side of the filter on both sides, insert the filter straight into the chassis until the tips of the levers are approximately even

with the edge of the chassis, See Figure 15 on page 83 .

3

Rotate the levers inward until they can be positioned behind and against the edge of the lower bend of the opening.

Note:

Do not rotate the levers inward until they are in this position.

Media Gateway 1000 Standard 19-inch Rack Mount Kit

A 19-inch Rack Mount Kit (NTTK09AA) is available for mounting a Media

Gateway Chassis and Media Gateway Expander in a 19-inch rack. It is

described in Table 17 on page 84

. For details on rack mounting a Media

Gateway Chassis and Media Gateway Expander, see “Rack-mounting the components” on page 127 .

Table 17

NTTK09AA installation

Order Code

P0904844

P0904845

P0906672

P097F813

P0719943

P0906671

P0719587

Description

Left Rack Mount Bracket

Right Rack Mount Bracket

Left Shelf Mounting Bracket U/O

Screw, .216- 24 X .500 STL 289A

Sems, Ext Tooth Washer Pan Head, CR

Type1A, 0.164- 32 X

Right Shelf Mounting Bracket U/O

Sems, Ext Tooth Washer Pan Head, CR Type

1A, 0.138- 3

1

4

Qty

1

8

1

1

4

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 85 of 484

Layer 2 Ethernet swtich

The Layer 2 Ethernet switch provides network connectivity for the ELAN and

TLAN subnets of a CS 1000E system. The Layer 2 Ethernet switch is customer supplied, and must meet the Voice over IP (VoIP) and Quality of

Service (QoS) requirements for your system. Nortel recommends the

Ethernet Routing Switch (ERS) portfolio of Layer 2 Ethernet switch products.

MRV Terminal Server

The Terminal Server, described in Table 18 on page 86, provides the

dedicated rlogin service used to establish serial connection between a

CS 1000E and various serial devices. The IP-based Terminal Server provides standard serial ports for applications that use a serial port interface. These applications include billing systems that analyze Call Detail Recording

(CDR) records, Site Event Buffers (SEB) that track fault conditions, and various legacy applications such as Property Management System (PMS) interface and intercept Computer applications. In addition, serial ports are used to connect maintenance terminals and modems for support staff.

The Terminal Server is configured to automatically log in to the active Core

CP PM Call Server upon start-up. It always connects to the Active CPU IP address.

The CS 1000E can configure up to 16 serial ports for applications within the configuration Data Block. Ports can be configured by using:

• login userid of "PTYnn" – TTY ports are specified where nn is the PTY port number configured for a particular TTY within LD 17. If a "PTYnn" userid is specified and that port is busy because of another login, an error message will be produced (on the maintenance consoles, in the report log, or as SNMP alarms).

• no userid – the highest available PTY port number is selected

The Terminal Server has the following attributes:

• support “rlogin” protocol on local access mode

• support transparent, or binary mode, on “rlogin” connection

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 86 of 484

System components

• support port speed up to 115kbps

• support auto rlogin connection and auto-retry after being disconnected

• support BOOTP

• support DHCP

• rack mounted to a 19-inch rack

• provide configurable username for each port

Table 18

MRV Terminal Server profile

Property

Product Model

Height

Power

Cooling

Card slots

Connectors

Description

MRV LX8020S-102AC-R

• 1 U (1 U = 1 3/4 inch or 4.4 cm)

• Power cord connectors located on the unit’s backplane.

• Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable.

• Unit is dual AC powered (120 V AV @ 0.5 amps).

• Forced air cooling with side-to-side air flow.

• The fans run at a single speed.

• Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked.

• None

• Twenty console ports for modular RJ-45 connectors

• One RJ-45 (10BaseT) network interface

19-inch rack

All CS 1000E system components are mounted in a customer-supplied

19-inch rack. Ground the rack and equipment to the NTDU6201 Ground Bar.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 87 of 484

System cables

Table 19 on page 88 lists the cables required with the CS 1000E system.

The base marketing package NTHU53AA provides an NTRC17 crossover cable to connect the HSP ports of the two core CP PM Call Servers. It also contains two MRV Terminal Server cables (NTDU6302) to connect from

COM port 1 of both core CP PM Call Servers to the MRV Terminal Server.

Note: Order the proper power cord for your region.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 88 of 484

System components

Table 19

CS 1000E cables (Part 1 of 2)

Component Descriptions Cable Kits

Cables &

Accessories Quantity

Qty of 2 MRV Terminal Server cables for connecting

COM port 1 of the CP PM Call Server to the Terminal

Server

HS cross-over cable used to connect the two call processors for redundancy.

NTDU6302

NTRC17BA

2

1

Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expander

Media Gateway cable kit

PC Maintenance Cable for accessing media card from the faceplate

AUX cable for Power Failure Transfer if required

NTDU25BA

NTAG81CA 1

NTAK1104 1

A0601396 1 25 pin M-F adapter, can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports

25 pin F-F adapter, can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports

Wrist strap

25 pin F-F Null modem adapter, can be used with the

NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports

A0601397

A0783105

A0378652

1

1

25 pin M-F Null modem adapter, can be used with the

NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports

Expansion cable kit NTDK89AA

A0381016

NTDK95BB 2 Expansion cable to connect the Media Gateway

DS-30 and CE-MUX to the Media Gateway Expander.

Disposable wrist strap

100BaseT Connection

A0783105 1

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

System components

Page 89 of 484

Table 19

CS 1000E cables (Part 2 of 2)

Component Descriptions Cable Kits

Cables &

Accessories Quantity

Signaling Servers, Layer two switch (BS 470), Carrier

Cards, ELAN on Gateways

MRV Terminal Server

RJ45 to 9-pin female RS232, 25 feet long, for connecting terminal equipment to the MRV Terminal

Server

Terminal server cable kit for interfacing with various terminal ports (that is, Signaling Server, Layer 2

Switch or Gateway using BK48 cable)

NTDU6303

CAT5 Cables

NTVW01iX

MRV Terminal Server cable for connecting various

Terminal Equipment to the Terminal Server

9-pin male to 9-pin female Null Modem adapter for use where connecting to DCE connections

25 to 9-pin male adapter to interface with NTBK48AA cable if desired

Power cords

NTDU6302 1

N0007485

N0007488

1

1

North American power Cord

UK power cord

Euro power cord

ANZ power cord

Swiss power cord

Denmark power cord

NTTK14AB

NTTK18AB

NTTK16AB

NTTK15AA

NTTK17AB

NTTK22AB

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 90 of 484

System components

Miscellaneous system components

Table 20 contains a list of miscellaneous items that can be used with the

CS 1000E system installation.

Table 20

Miscellaneous components

Order Code

QUA6A

NTBK80BA

Description

Power Failure

Transfer Unit

Ground bar

Purpose

To transfer trunk lines during a power failure

NTDU6201

NT6D5304

NTAK92BA

NT1R20BA

Ground bar

Ground bar

External Protection

Device

Extended Line card

Off-Premises

Ground Bar Meridian 1 Option 11C for same room AC Cabinets (1 per system and 2 or more cabinets)

Ground Bar/LRE - Large

Ground Bar/LRE - Small

Protects up to four off-premises analog

(500/2500-type) telephones

Connects up to eight off-premises analog

(500/2500-type) telephones

Uninterruptible Power Supply

Use an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) to provide a backup power supply for the entire CS 1000E system.

A UPS provides a continuous AC power supply. Refer to Communication

Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering (NN43041-220) for calculating power consumption requirements.

Install the UPS unit according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

98

Page 91 of 484

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling

Server

Contents

This chapter contains the following topics:

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Supported configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Software applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Overview

A Communication Server 1000 system consists of two major functional components, a Call Server and a Signaling Server. These two components have historically been running on separate Intel Pentium processor-based hardware platforms operating under the VxWorks Operating System.

The Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server (Co-res CS and SS) runs the Call Server software, Signaling Server software, and System

Management software on one hardware platform running the Linux Base

Operating System. For Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0, the Co-res

CS and SS is supported on various hardaware platforms, see Table 1:

“Hardware platform supported roles” on page 34 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 92 of 484

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

The Co-res CS and SS provides a cost effective solution for Communication

Server 1000 system installations that do not require a high user capacity or the need for a redundant Call Server.

This chapter provides a high level overview only. For more information about

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server, see Co-resident Call Server

and Signaling Server Fundamentals (NN43001-509).

Supported configurations

You require a Media Gateway, Gateway Controller, and Server to deploy the

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server in the following configurations:

• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)

• Branch Office Media Gateway (MG 1000B)

• Survivable Media Gateway (SMG)

• Survivable SIP Media Gateway (SSMG)

• Communication Server 1000E TDM (for details on the CS 1000E TDM system, see Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server Fundamentals

(NN43001-509).

You can deploy a Co-res CS and SS as a Main Office, Branch Office, SMG or SSMG.

For information about installing an SMG or SSMG, see Communication

Server 1000 System Redundancy Fundamentals (NN43001-507).

For information about CS 1000E capacity limitations, see Communication

Server 1000E Planning and Engineering (NN43041-220)

Co-res CS and SS based CS 1000E system

Figure 16 on page 93 provides an example of a CS 1000E system with a

Co-res CS and SS in a MG 1000E chassis. You can also use an MG 1010, chassis, cabinet, or a COTS2 server to deploy a Co-res CS and SS.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

Page 93 of 484

Figure 16

CS1000E Co-res and SS System

For information on adding an optional second Signaling Server to a Co-res

CS and SS, see Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and

Commissioning (NN43001-315).

Co-res CS and SS based Branch Office Media Gateway

Figure 17 on page 94 provides an example of a Co-res CS and SS based

Branch Office Media Gateway (MG 1000B) system.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 94 of 484

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

Figure 17: MG 1000E Co-res CS and SS system

Communication Server 1000E TDM

Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 supports a TDM only version of the

CoRes CS and SS system. The CS 1000E TDM system has the following capacity limitations:

• 800 combined TDM users (Traditional, DECT users, including installed plus add-on)

• 5 Media Gateways

• 16 PRI cards

• 200 ACD Agents

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

Page 95 of 484

• 0 IP Phones (no UNIStim, no SIP Line, no SIP DECT)

• 0 Virtual Trunks

The CS 1000E TDM system does not support NRS.

High Availability (HA) support

In CS 1000 Release 7.0, the Co-res CS and SS does not support an HA configuration (dual core with either Active or Inactive role). For systems that require HA configuration, you must deploy a VxWorks-based

Communication Server 1000 system.

Hardware

The Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 Co-resident Call Server and

Signaling Server is supported on CP PM cards, CP MG cards, CP DC cards, and COTS2 servers running the Linux Base Operating System.

The Co-res CS and SS can run on the CP PM hardware platform introduced in Communication Server 1000 Release 5.0, however the software changes from VxWorks to Linux, and a CP PM Linux upgrade kit is required. The

CP PM card requires BIOS version 18 or later and memory and media as listed in Appendix B to support the Co-res CS and SS configuration.

Note: CP PM version 2 (NTDW66CAE5/E6; NTDW99CAE5/E6) does not require a BIOS update, or upgrade kit to support the Co-res CS and

SS configuration.

NTM427CBE6 CP PM upgrade kit

The NTM427CBE6 CP PM Linux Upgrade kit includes the following items:

• NTDW6102E5 - CP PM Signaling Server Hard Drive kit (Linux OS preloaded)

• NTM42703 - 2 GB Compact Flash (CF) with Linux software

• 2 GB blank CF card

• NTDW6109E6 - 1 GB DDR SO-DIMM memory upgrade

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 96 of 484

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

• NTAK19ECE6 - CP PM Signaling Server 2 port SDI Cable assembly kit

• a DTE-DTE null modem cable (supplied)

CP PM Media Storage

The CP PM card for a Co-res CS and SS includes an internal Fixed Media

Drive (FMD). You must ensure switch S5 on the CP PM card is in position 2 to enable the system to boot from the hard drive FMD. Switch S5 in position

1 configures the CP PM card to boot from an internal Compact Flash (CF)

FMD.

The CP PM card supports two types of Removable Media Drives (RMD)

• CF card, supports the installation of Linux Base and Linux applications

• USB memory stick device, supports the installation of Linux applications (cannot use to install Linux Base)

For more information about supported media for Linux-based Co-resident

Call Server and Signaling Server installations, see Linux Platform Base and

Applications Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-315).

CP MG, CP DC, and COTS2 media storage

The CP MG card, CP DC card, and COTS2 servers all contain an internal

Fixed Media Drive (FMD) pre-loaded with the Linux Base Operating

System.

The CP MG and CP DC support USB 2.0 storage devices as Removable

Media Drives (RMD). A bootable USB 2.0 storage device can be used to install or patch the Linux Base Operating System. The COTS servers support bootable DVD. CF cards are not supported as RMD on CP MG, CP DC or

COTS hardware.

Software applications

The Co-res CS and SS supports the following software applications

• Linux Call Server

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

Page 97 of 484

• Line Telephony Proxy Server (LTPS)

• Unicode Name Directory (UND)

• Signaling Server Gateway including H.323 Gateway and SIP Gateway

• SIP Line Gateway

• Failsafe SIP Proxy service, Gatekeeper

• Personal Directory (PD)

• Network Routing Service (NRS)

— You can configure the NRS as a Primary, however you can only configure NRS as a Secondary if the Primary is also running on a Co-res

CS and SS.

— The CP PM Co-res CS and SS does not support a Secondary or backup

NRS to a capacity higher than the Primary NRS due to the small disk size and low call rates on a CP PM Co-res CS and SS system.

• Element Manager (EM)

• Unified Communications Management (UCM) Primary security server in limited deployment. For more information about UCM Primary

Security Server procedures, see Linux Platform Base and Applications

Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-315).

Element Manager

The Element Manager (EM) interface includes the configuration and enabling of Signaling Server application services such as UNIStim, LTPS,

SIP Gateway, H.323 Gateway, and SIP Line.

For more information about EM, see Element Manager System Reference -

Administration (NN43001-632).

Secure File Transfer Protocol

Secure Shell (SSH) Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is installed and enabled on CS 1000 Release 7.0 systems by default. This secure protocol replaces regular File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and other insecure data transfer protocols for several CS 1000 applications.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 98 of 484

Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server

SFTP is a network protocol that provides confidentiality and integrity to data

(such as files or commands) transmitted between an SFTP client and a server.

In addition, SFTP allows a client and a server to authenticate each other. In

CS 1000 Release 7.0, a password is used by an SFTP server to authenticate an SFTP client.

For detailed information on FTP and SFTP, see Security Management

(NN43001-604).

Joining and leaving the UCM security domain

The UCM Primary Security Server acts as the RADIUS server from which

Communication Server 1000 devices obtain authentication and access control parameters for CLI access. The RADIUS related parameters are sent from the

UCM Primary Security Server to Communication Server 1000 devices using

SSH protocol.

When a device joins the UCM security domain, a mutually-trusted SSH channel is created.

Before the UCM primary server RSA public key is added to the authorized key file, the fingerprint of the public key must be confirmed manually. This verification prevents third-party intercepts.

Once a mutually trusted SSH tunnel has been established for the first time, the

UCM Primary Security Server can send SSH remote commands to the device using RSA public key-based authentication.

For detailed information, see Security Management (NN43001-604).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

126

Page 99 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral

Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Contents

This section provides information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Network Connection and Dual Homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Adding ELAN routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Installation and commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Introduction

You can convert Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 large system

NT8D37 IPE modules into Communication Server 1000E Media Gateways with a Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller

(MG XPEC) card. The MG XPEC card provides a solution to migrate IPE modules from a Meridian 1 TDM system, or a CS 1000M system to a CS

1000E system. The MG XPEC card functions as a Gateway Controller and converts one IPE module into two Media Gateway shelves (IPMG type

MGX) for use in a CS 1000E system.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 100 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Functional description

System architecture

The MG XPEC is a double wide, dual card Gateway Controller assembly based on the MGC hardware. It is used to control line cards in an NT8D37

IPE module. The MG XPEC features a motherboard and daughterboard architecture. The two halves of the MG XPEC card act independently to control separate Media Gateway shelves, providing the same hardware functionality of an MGC.

There are no removable DSP daughterboards on the MG XPEC, however each board of the dual card assembly is populated with 192 DSP resources which are recognized by the software as MGC DSP daughterboards.

Therefore, from a software perspective, each board of the dual card assembly features two high density MGC DSP daughterboards.

The MG XPEC can be thought of as two separate MGC cards bolted together.

The left board (motherboard) contros the left half of the of the IPE module and the right board (daughterboard) controls the right half of the IPE module.

Loadware

The MGC and MG XPEC run the same MGC loadware. A run time check identifies which hardware platform the MGC loadware is running on, controlling the flow of software appropriate for each platform. For more

information about upgrading loadware, see “Loadware upgrade” on page 225

.

If one half of the dual card assembly is not configured, the other configured half functions normally.

The Call Server recognizes the MG XPEC as two separate Media Gateway loops, each with an IPMG loop type of MGX. The MG XPEC communicates with the Call Server through the ELAN instead of the DS30Y TDM loops used by the previous XPEC card.

Note: The IPMG package must be enabled for the Call Server to accept

IP Media Gateway connections.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 101 of 484

Table 21 on page 101 provides a list of loadware files used by both the MGC.

and MG XPEC.

Table 21

Loadware files used by both MG XPEC and MGC

Loadware

Name Description Notes

MGCCXX## The CSP load which contains the Nortel code to control the MGX during normal operation.

MGCBXX## This is the boot code.

Same file as MGC with a run time check to determine if MGC or MG XPEC platform.

MGCGXX## The gold image installed at manufacturing.

Same file as MGC with a run time check to determine if MGC or MG XPEC platform.

Same file as MGC with a run time check to determine if MGC or MG XPEC platform.

MGCAXX## This is the application file for special functionality.

MGCFXX## The FPGA load.

Same file as MGC with a run time check to determine if MGC or MG XPEC platform.

Same file as MGC.

The internal FPGA files are different for the MGC and MG XPEC. The install routine programs the correct file into the FPGA based on platform.

Same file as MGC no modifications.

MGCMXX## Mindspeed load for the

Chagall.

DSP1XX##

DSP2XX##

Mindspeed load for

96-port DB.

Mindspeed load for

32-port DB.

DSP3XX## Mindspeed load for

128-port DB.

Same file as MGC no modifications.

Same file as MGC no modifications.

Same file as MGC no modifications

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 102 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Each half of the MG XPEC functions identically to the MGC, except where stated below:

• Each board of the dual card assembly controls eight slots of the IPE module, for a total of 16 slots. The MGC controls 10 slots. The motherboard controls the 8 IPE slots to the left of the MG XPEC and the daughterboard controls the 8 IPE slots to the right of the MG XPEC. Card slots are numbered from 0 to 7 for the motherboard and 0 to 7 for the daughterboard. MGC card slots are numbered from 1 to 10.

• CEMUX cards such as Digital Trunks are not supported in IPE modules with MG XPEC cards. You can use CEMUX cards in a Media Gateway cabinet or chassis with a MGC card. The following IPE cards supported by the NT8D01 XPEC card are not supported by the NTDW20

MG XPEC card.

– NT6D70 BRI SILC Voice/Circuit/Packet Data Lines

– NT6D71 BRI UILC Voice/Circuit/Packet Data Lines

– NT6D72 BRSC Basic Rait Concentrator

– NT7D16 Data Access Line Card

• The Card LAN bus is shared between the motherboard and daughterboard.

• The third TTY on the MG XPEC motherboard is dedicated for support of the master XSM card (NT8D22AEE5). The third TTY is not available on the MG XPEC daughterboard. An XSM cable (NTDW26BAE6) is required to monitor XSM status.

• The MG XPEC motherboard also provides a relay contact to replace the

Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) contact in the XSM module located in the base of the column.

• The MG XPEC motherboard and daughterboard each provide 192 DSP ports. The software detects the 192 DSP ports as two 96 port MGC DSB daughterboards. Logical cards slots 8 to13 are dedicated for the DSP resources.

– card slots 8, 9, and 10 are dedicated for 96 port DSP daughterboard 2

– card slots 11, 12 and 13 are dedicated for 96 port DSP daughterboard 1

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 103 of 484

• The MG XPEC registers to the Call Server as an IPMG type of MGX.

Network Connection and Dual Homing

Each half of the MG XPEC card has four physical network connections, for a total of eight physical network faceplate connections. There are no physical

network back plane connections. Figure 18 on page 104 provides a view of

the MG XPEC faceplate.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 104 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 18

MG XPEC faceplate

Each half of the MG XPEC must have its own network connections as well as its own set of IP addresses. To connect an MG XPEC for Dual Homing each half requires two ELAN and two TLAN physical connections as well as one ELAN IP address and three TLAN IP addresses. This is a total of four

ELAN physical connections, four TLAN physical connections, two ELAN IP

address and six TLAN IP addresses for each MG XPEC card. See Figure 19 on page 105 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 105 of 484

The dual homing feature on the MG XPEC works identically to the MGC except all four network connections are on the faceplate. Dual homing works independently for each half of the MG XPEC. Network traffic is independent for each half of the dual card assembly. For example, Network traffic sent and received on the motherboard is not seen by daughteboard.

If you do not require Dual Homing, then you only require one physical ELAN connection and one physical TLAN connection for each half of the dual card assembly.

Figure 19

Connecting MG XPEC to the network

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 106 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Adding ELAN routes

You can add routes to the ELAN on the MG XPEC card. The route information is read from an XML configuration file retrieved from the Call

Server during registration. IP addresses in the list of routes are then added to the ELAN. The XML is file created on the Call Server by Element Manager.

Since the two halves of the MG XPEC control separate Media Gateway loops, you must configure separate routes on each half of the dual card assembly.

Installation and commissioning

The following tools are needed to modify the NT8D37 IPE module:

• 5mm 1/4” socket and ratchet

• large straight slot screwdriver

• electric screwdriver with PH1 Phillips bit and small straight slot bit

• side cutting pliers

The following hardware is needed to install an MG XPEC card:

• NTDW20AAE6 MG XPEC hardware pack

• NTDW25AAE6 cable kit, which includes:

i.

2 new I/O Panels (Note: both are identical with labelling for installation on the left hand side on one face and the right hand side of the other face)

ii.

2 NTDW26ABE6 TTY cables

iii. 8 Cat-5e shield straight through ethernet cables (sufficient to route all ethernet ports for dual-homing configuration)

iv. 12 RJ45 couplers

v.

1 Card Slot label

• NTDW26BAE6 XSM (eXtended System Monitor) cable (only required if MG XPEC is connected to an NT8D22AEE5 master XSM)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 107 of 484

Note: You require only one XSM cable for each migrated Meridian 1 or

CS 1000M large system. Connect one MG XPEC motherboard to the master XSM with the NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable to enable monitoring

of the XSM status. See “Extended System Monitoring and Power Fail

Transfer” on page 114 .

Installing the MG XPEC

Installing the MG XPEC involves the following procedures:

1

Installing the new I/O panels (see Procedure 2 on page 108

)

2

Cabling the MG XPEC motherboard (see Procedure 3 on page 109

)

3

Cabling the MG XPEC daughterboard (Procedure 4 on page 111

)

4

Installing the MG XPEC pack (see Procedure 5 on page 112 )

5

Installing the new card slot label (see Procedure 6 on page 112

)

6

Installing the Ethernet cables (see Procedure 7 on page 113 )

7

(Optional) Installing the XSM cable (see Procedure 8 on page 117 )

8

(Optional) Installing the Clock Reference cables (see Procedure 9 on page 122

)

9

Preparing the IPE module for configuration (see Procedure 10 on page 123

)

10 Configuring the MG XPEC card (see Procedure 11 on page 123 )

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 108 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Procedure 2

Installing the new I/O panels

1

Disconnect power to the IPE module.

• If the module is powered by AC, turn off the AC breakers on the front of the module.

• If the module is powered by DC, disconnect DC power from the pedestal.

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

You must disconnect power to the IPE module before installing equipment.

Use caution when disconnecting AC or DC power.

Electric shock can occur.

2

Remove the middle access panel from the rear of the module.

3

Remove the DS30Y cables from rear backplane connectors, SL0-SL3, of the controller slot and remove all DS30Y cables from the IPE module.

4

Unscrew the upper hex nut and lower screw from each MDF connector

(retain the hardware for reuse with the new panel).

5

Remove each MDF connector from the I/O panel and mark with letter corresponding to the I/O panel slot from which it was removed (A - H) to aid reinstallation in the new panel.

6

Remove and retain the 8 screws that fasten the I/O panel to the chassis.

7

Remove the I/O panel.

8

Install the new I/O panel (side labelled Right facing outwards) using the 8 screws.

9

Reinstall the MDF connectors to the appropriate slots in the new I/O panel.

10 Remove metal punch-outs from the four ethernet and two TTY openings in the new I/O panel.

11 Insert the RJ45 couplers into these openings.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 109 of 484

12 Repeat these steps to install the left side of the I/O panel (side labelled

Left facing outwards).

End of Procedure

Procedure 3

Cabling the MG XPEC motherboard

1

Align the P1 connector of one of the NTDW26ABE6 TTY Cables with backplane connector SL1 (Note the orientation of the arrow labelled "UP" on the P1 connector).

2

Insert P1 into the backplane connector of SL1.

3

Align J1 (labelled TTY-0) and J2 (labelled TTY-1) connectors of the

NTDW26ABE6 cable with the respective RJ45 couplers on the right hand

side I/O Panel (see Figure 20 on page 110 ) and insert cables.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 110 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 20

TTY cables

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

End of Procedure

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 111 of 484

Procedure 4

Cabling the MG XPEC daughterboard

1

Repeat as for motherboard TTY connector but use the second

NTDW26ABE6 TTY cable to connect the backplane connector SL3 to the

left hand side I/O Panel (see Figure 21 on page 111

).

Figure 21

Daughterboard connection

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 112 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Procedure 5

Installing the MG XPEC pack

1

Remove the XPEC card from the controller slot.

2

Insert the MG XPEC card into the controller slot.

End of Procedure

Procedure 6

Installing the new card slot label

1

Remove the backing from the new Card Slot label to expose the adhesive.

2

Apply the new Card Slot label to the right hand side of the lower card guide/rail, covering up existing markings for slots 8 through 15.

3

Align slot 0 of the new label with slot 8 of the existing marking (see

Figure 22 on page 112

).

Figure 22

Slot card label

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

End of Procedure

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 113 of 484

Procedure 7

Installing the Ethernet cables

1

Remove the right hand side access cover from the front of the shelf.

2

Remove the left hand side access cover from the rear of the shelf.

3

Connect one of the supplied Cat-5e ethernet cables to the RJ45 coupler

(labelled "E") on the right hand side of the I/O Panel (see Figure 23 on page 114 ).

4

Route this cable through the left side access to the front of the shelf.

5

Connect this cable to the MG XPEC MB side faceplate port (also labelled

"E").

6

Repeat for MG XPEC MB "T".

7

Repeat the above connections for the MG XPEC DB "E" and "T" ports using the left hand side I/O panel.

Note:

If this is a dual-homing configuration, repeat the above connections for the "1E" and "2T" ports of both MG XPEC MB and DB.

Route the MB connections to the right hand side rear I/O Panel and the

DB connections the left hand side rear I/O Panel.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 114 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 23

Ethernet connections (rear)

End of Procedure

Extended System Monitoring and Power Fail Transfer

The CS 1000E Call Server can monitor the eXtended System Monitor (XSM) status of the large system columns. The MG XPEC card can activate a Power

Fail Transfer (PFT) if a link to the Call Server is lost, or if the MG XPEC card reboots.

You need the following equipment to enable XSM status monitoring:

• MG XPEC card in an IPE module

• Master XSM for MG XPEC (NT8D22AEE5)

• XSM cable (NTDW26BAE6)

• NT8D46AG cable in a Meridian 1 or CS 1000M core/net shelf

The following equipment is optional, but required to enable PFT features:

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 115 of 484

• PFT unit connected to the MDF field

• Customer provided and modified Cat-5 cable for PFT

The NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable is shown in Figure 24 on page 115

.

Figure 24

NTDW22BAE6 XSM cable

The NT8D46AG cable is shown in Figure 25 on page 116 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 116 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 25

NT8D46AG cable

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 117 of 484

Procedure 8

Installing the XSM cable

1

Connect the P1 connection of the NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable to the SL0

connector on the backplane of the NT8D37 IPE module (see Figure 26 on page 117 ).

Figure 26

NT8D37 IPE module SL0 connector

2

Connect the J2 connection of the NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable to a RJ45 coupler in the I/O panel on the IPE module.

3

Route the NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable from the IPE module to the core/net shelf which contains a NT8D46AG cable.

4

Disconnect the P3 connection on the NT8D46AG cable from the SDI card

in the core/net shelf (see Figure 27 on page 118 ).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 118 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 27

NT8D46AG cable P3 connector in core/net shelf

5

Connect the P3 connector on the NT8D46AG cable into the J1 connector on the NTDW26BAE6 XSM cable.

6

Ensure the master XSM is NT8D22AEE5 to support the MG XPEC card,

see Figure 28 on page 119 . Configure switches on master XSM to the

following to identify connection to a MG XPEC card:

— SW1-1 switch to OFF

— SW2-2 switch to ON

Also ensure the XSM switches are configured for master XSM.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 119 of 484

Figure 28

NT8D22AEE5 master XSM

Note:

Running an older master XSM firmware (NT8D22AC/AD), or failure to set the XSM switches properly causes the column top alarm LED to light, and disables the IPE ring generator.

7

To enable PFT, connect two signals from the XSM cable J2 connector to

PFT signals LFBEN and LFBENR at the MDF field. A PFT wiring

schematic is shown in Figure 29 on page 121

.

You must modify the Cat-5 cable to relay the following signals.

— J2.1 = LFBEN

— J2.2 = LFBENR

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 120 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

You only need to modify the Cat-5 cable at the end connecting to the MDF field. Connect the RJ45 connector on the Cat-5 cable to the J2 connector on the IPE module I/O panel. Connect the modified end of the Cat-5 cable to the

MDF field connections for your PFT unit.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 121 of 484

Figure 29

MDF field PFT wiring to XSM

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 122 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

PFT activates if the relay connection between LFBEN and LFBENR closes.

The PFT automatically activates if the MG XPEC link to the Call Server is lost, or if the MG XPEC motherboard reboots.

End of Procedure

Clock reference

In configurations with DECT spanning of multiple IPE modules (or with Call

Pilot MGATE cards), Clock Reference cables synchronize the backplane

TDM clocks of multiple MG XPECs.

You do not require clock synchronization of multiple IPE modules in normal situations with DLC, ALC, or other ordinary peripherals.

Procedure 9

Installing the Clock Reference cables

1

Connect a customer provided Cat-5 or Cat-5e straight through cable to the faceplate CLK-OUT port of the MG XPEC selected as clock master

(selected at random).

Note:

Do not connect a cable to the CLK-IN port on the MG XPEC card you selected as clock master.

2

Route this cable to the next MG XPEC in the clock chain.

3

Connect to the CLK-IN port of this MG XPEC.

4

Repeat this series of connections for all MG XPECs in the clock chain.

Note:

A maximum of 4 MG XPECs may be chained. Nortel recommends you to use Ethernet cables shorter than 5 meters for clock referencing.

End of Procedure

Final assembly and configuration

After performing the MG XPEC card installation procedures, perform the following procedures to configure the MG XPEC card.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 123 of 484

Procedure 10

Preparing IPE module for configuration

After all equipment is installed:

1

Replace all covers removed during installation.

2

Connect all IPE MDF cables to I/O panel.

3

Connect all LAN cables to I/O panel.

4

Re-label MDF connections to match new loop and card assignments.

5

Route both TTY0 cables to a local workstation to perform initial configuration.

6

Re-connect AC or DC power to the IPE module.

End of Procedure

Procedure 11

Configuring the MG XPEC card

Note: You must perform the configuration procedure twice for an

MG XPEC card. You must individually configure the MG XPEC motherboard and daughterboard with mgcsetup to fully configure an

MG XPEC card.

1

Connect one of the two TTY0 serial cables to a local workstation.

2

Configure the local workstation terminal to 9660 baud 8-N-1 and VT-100 emulation.

3

Turn on power to IPE module. The first time the MG XPEC card boots, it automatically enters the mgcsetup menu.

4

Enter the ELAN IP, gateway, subnet mask, and Call Server IP address with mgcsetup. You configure the MG XPEC card the same way as configuring a MGC card, see

“Configuring the Gateway Controller

(mgcsetup)” on page 159 .

5

Repeat steps 1 to 4. Use the other TTY0 serial cable to configure the other half of the MG XPEC card

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 124 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Figure 30 on page 124

and Figure 31 on page 125

show an IPE shelf with

XPEC and MG XPEC installed.

Figure 30

IPE Shelf with XPEC Installed

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

Page 125 of 484

Figure 31

IPE Shelf with MG XPEC Installed

Maintenance

For MG XPEC Overlay configuration information, see Communication

Server 1000E: Maintenance (NN43041-700).

Element Manager

Media Gateway display type

Element Manager displays a Media Gateway type of MGX for an MG XPEC.

See Figure 32 on page 126 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 126 of 484

Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC)

For details on configuring an MGX type Media Gateway in Element

Manager, see “Configuring the Media Gateway” on page 273 .

Figure 32

MGX type in Element Manager

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

142

Rack-mounting the components

Page 127 of 484

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Lifting system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Guidelines for component placement in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000, Media Gateway 1010, or

Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Introduction

All CS 1000E system components are installed in a customer-supplied,

19-inch rack. Also refer to the equipment layout plan and card slot assignment plan for additional information.

Component air circulation is either from front to back or from side to side.

Therefore, components can be mounted immediately above or below an installed component. The rack’s u pattern provides adequate clearance between components. For example, a Media Gateway Expander could be installed in the next 5u pattern of mounting holes below an already installed

Media Gateway. The Media Gateway Expander would be approximately

1/4 in from the Media Gateway 1000.

Note: In the 5u pattern, a “u” is equal to 1.75 in. and includes three holes spaced at 5/8 in. + 5/8 in. + 1/2 in.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 128 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Other data communications equipment can be installed in a rack with

CS 1000E system components.

IMPORTANT!

Ensure that the unit’s power cord is appropriate for the area’s electrical service. Do not modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the correct type.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 12: "Removing the cover of a Media Gateway or Media

Gateway Expander" on page 130

•

Procedure 13: "Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000 or Media

Gateway Expander" on page 132

•

Procedure 14: "Removing the cover of a Media Gateway 1010" on page 136

•

Procedure 15: "Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1010" on page 137

Lifting system components

Exercise care when lifting system components. If necessary, get assistance to

lift a component or install components in a rack. Table 22 on page 128 lists

examples of CS 1000E system component weight. Consult the manufacturer’s documentation for the weight of other components installed during the CS 1000E system installation.

Table 22

Approximate weight of CS 1000E system components (Part 1 of 2)

Component

Media Gateway 1000

— without cards

— with 4 cards

Lbs

26

30

Kg

12

13.5

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 129 of 484

Table 22

Approximate weight of CS 1000E system components (Part 2 of 2)

Lbs Kg Component

Media Gateway Expander

— without cards

— with 4 cards

Media Gateway 1010

— with MGU only

— MGU and 1 power supply

— MGU and 2 power supplies

— MGU, 2 power supplies, 2 CP PM,

1 MGC, and 10 typical IPE cards)

Layer 2 Ethernet Switch - aproximate typical weight

MRV Terminal Server

26

30

58

66

74

95

15

11

12

13.5

6.8

5

26.5

30

33.5

43

Guidelines for component placement in a rack

When installing equipment, the Layer two switches should be in a central location to allow for easy access of all LAN cabling. The Media Gateway

1000s, Media Gateway 1010s, and Media Gateway Expanders must be mounted together vertically, and they must be powered from the same power rail. Typical vertical power bars in equipment racks are rated at 15/20 amps

@ 120 volts. Ensure that the equipment load does not exceed the power bar rating. Refer to Communication Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering

(NN43041-220) for information on power consumption. Do not place redundant equipment on the same electrical circuit.

There are no thermal concerns about equipment placement.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 130 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Note 1: Leave wall space for the cross-connect terminal.

Note 2: Position the rack so that you have access to both the front and rear.

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000,

Media Gateway 1010, or Media Gateway Expander

The Media Gateway Expander can be mounted either above or below the

Media Gateway 1000.

The following items are required to mount each Media Gateway 1000, Media

Gateway 1010, or Media Gateway Expander in a 19-inch rack:

• equipment layout plan

• 8 – #10-32 machine screws

• 19-Inch Rack Mount Kit (NTTK09)

The 19 Inch Rack Mount Kit (NTTK09) contains the following accessories:

• 1 – left guide bracket

• 1 – right guide bracket

• 1 – left ear bracket

• 1 – right ear bracket

• 4 – #8-32 machine screws

Follow Procedure 12 on page 130

to remove the cover on a Media Gateway

1000 or a Media Gateway Expander.

Procedure 12

Removing the cover of a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander

1

If the cover lock latches are in their locked position:

a.

Use a flat screwdriver to slide the icon away from the latch. Refer to

Figure 33 on page 131

.

b.

Slide both spring-loaded latches simultaneously down toward the bottom of the Media Gateway 1000, and pull forward. Then lift the

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 131 of 484

cover upward to remove it from the Media Gateway 1000. Refer to

Figure 34 on page 132

.

Note:

The bottom of the front cover is supported by, but not secured to, the Media Gateway 1000. Do not drop it.

Figure 33

Unlock the latches

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 132 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Figure 34

Unlock the cover

End of Procedure

Procedure 13

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1000 or Media Gateway Expander

1

Fasten the right guide bracket to the right rack support.

a.

Insert two #10-32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the guide bracket and into the respective holes in the right rack support.

See Figure 35.

b.

Fasten the screws.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 133 of 484

Figure 35

Guide bracket installed in a rack

#10-32

2

Fasten the left guide bracket to the left rack support.

a.

Insert two #10-32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the bracket and into the respective holes in the left rack support.

b.

Fasten the screws.

3

Attach the right ear bracket (marked with an “R”) to the holes on the right side of the Media Gateway 1000.

a.

Use two #8-32 machine screws. Position the ear bracket so that the four holes on the bracket flange are nearer to the rear of the Media

Gateway 1000.

Note:

To determine the front of the bracket, locate the “R” on the bracket.

The “R” must be at the top of the bracket and face the front of the Media

Gateway 1000 (see Figure 36).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 134 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Figure 36

Right ear bracket on a Media Gateway 1000

Bracket flange marked with an “R”. Attach this ear bracket to the righthand side of the

Media Gateway.

Attach the ear bracket to these holes.

4

Attach the left ear bracket (marked with an “L”) to the holes on the left side of the Media Gateway 1000 (near the front).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 135 of 484

a.

Use two #8-32 machine screws. Position the ear bracket so the four holes on the bracket flange are closer to the rear of the Media

Gateway 1000.

Note:

To determine the front of the bracket, locate the “L” on the bracket.

The “L” must be at the top of the bracket and face the front of the Media

Gateway 1000.

WARNING

A Media Gateway 1000, Media Gateway 1010, or a

Media Gateway Expander each weighs approximately

30 lb. (13.5 kg) with circuit cards installed and 26 lb.

(12 kg) without circuit cards installed. If necessary, get assistance when lifting the equipment.

5

Place the Media Gateway 1000 on the guide brackets.

a.

Carefully slide the Media Gateway 1000 into the rack until the ear brackets come to rest against the rack support.

Note:

Make sure that the rear of the Media Gateway 1000 is on the guide

brackets. See Figure 37 on page 135

.

6

Use the four remaining #10-32 machine screws to fasten the Media

Gateway 1000 to the rack supports (two screws on each side).

Figure 37

Media Gateway 1000 installed in a rack

Use two screws on each side to fasten the Media Gateway

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 136 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Procedure 14

Removing the cover of a Media Gateway 1010

1

If the cover lock latches are in their locked position:

a.

Use a flat screwdriver to unlock the latches. Refer to Figure 38 on page 136 .

b.

Push both spring-loaded latches simultaneously to open (or close) the MG1010 door. Then lift the cover upward to remove it. Refer to

Figure 39 on page 137

.

Figure 38

Unlock the MG1010 latches

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 39

Unlock the cover

Rack-mounting the components

Page 137 of 484

End of Procedure

Procedure 15

Rack-mounting a Media Gateway 1010

1

Fasten the right guide bracket to the right rack support.

a.

Insert two #10-32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the guide bracket and into the respective holes in the right rack support.

See Figure 35.

b.

Fasten the screws.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 138 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Figure 40

Guide bracket installed in a rack

#10-32

2

Fasten the left guide bracket to the left rack support.

a.

Insert two #10-32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the bracket and into the respective holes in the left rack support.

b.

Fasten the screws.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 139 of 484

3

Slide the MG1010 chassis into place. See Figure 41

Figure 41

Media Gateway 1010 chassis

4

Install the remaining 10 screws, 5 on each side. See Figure 42 on page 140 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 140 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Figure 42

Media Gateway 1010 chassis screws

5

The tabs on the bottom of the MG1010 door fit into the slots at the bottom

of the chassis. See Figure 43 on page 141 .

With the door tabs positoned into the MG1010 chassis slots, pivot the

MG1010 door closed. See Figure 44 on page 142 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Rack-mounting the components

Page 141 of 484

Figure 43

Media Gateway 1010 chassis door tabs

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 142 of 484

Rack-mounting the components

Figure 44

Closing the Media Gateway 1010 chassis door

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

End of Procedure

152

Page 143 of 484

Installing system grounds

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Installing a ground bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel . . 147

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels . . 149

Grounding a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Grounding other rack-mounted components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Grounding equipment in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Introduction

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 16: "Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar" on page 145

•

Procedure 17: "Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar" on page 146

•

Procedure 18: "Grounding Media Gateways powered by the same electrical panel" on page 147 .

•

Procedure 19: "Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels" on page 149

•

Procedure 20: "Grounding a Media Gateway Expander" on page 150

•

Procedure 21: "Grounding equipment in the UK" on page 152

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 144 of 484

Installing system grounds

Refer to your grounding plan for additional information.

WARNING

Correct grounding is very important. Failure to complete the grounding procedures could result in a system that is unsafe for the personnel using the equipment.

CAUTION — Service Interruption

If your system is not grounded correctly, it cannot be protected from lightning or power surges, and it could be subject to service interruptions. You must use insulated ground wire for system grounding.

CAUTION — Service Interruption

To prevent ground loops, power all equipment from the same dedicated electrical panel.

WARNING

For rack configurations, equipment must be powered from the same electrical panel.

Installing a ground bar

Install the NTBK80 Ground Bar for up to six Media Gateways with their

Expander. Install the NTDU6201 Ground Bar for up to 35 ground connections. Reference to ground bar in this NTP refers to either the NTBK80 or the NTDU6201 Ground Bar.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing system grounds

Page 145 of 484

Follow Procedure 16 to install a ground bar.

Procedure 16

Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar

1

Place the ground bar near the equipment.

Note:

The ground bar is a bridging point for ground wires from up to six components.

2

Connect the ground bar to the ground bus in the AC electrical panel using

#6 AWG wire. See Table 23 on page 145

for region-specific grounding requirements.

WARNING

A qualified technician or electrician must make the connection in the AC electrical panel.

3

Place a tag marked DO NOT DISCONNECT on the ground wire at the electrical panel.

4

Test the ground

Refer to Figure 45 on page 146 for the NTBK80 Ground Bar

Table 23

Region-specific grounding wire requirements

Region

Germany

Other regions in Europe

UK

Grounding wire requirements

#8 AWG (8.36 mm

2

) green/yellow wire not smaller than #6 AWG

(13.3 mm

2

) at any point two green/yellow wires no thinner than two 10 mm

2

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 146 of 484

Installing system grounds

Figure 45

NTBK80 Ground Bar

End of Procedure

Follow Procedure 17 to install an

NTDU6201 Ground Bar.

Procedure 17

Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar

1

Place the NTDU6201 Ground Bar near the equipment.

Note:

The ground bar is a bridging point for ground wires from up to

48 components.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing system grounds

Page 147 of 484

2

Connect the NTDU6201 Ground Bar to the ground bus in the AC electrical panel, or to TGB for an ANSI/EIA/TIA 607 installation using #6 AWG wire.

See Table 23 on page 145

for region-specific grounding requirements.

WARNING

A qualified technician or electrician must make the connection in the AC electrical panel.

3

Place a tag marked DO NOT DISCONNECT on the ground wire at the electrical panel.

4

Test the ground.

End of Procedure

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel

Follow Procedure 18 to ground one or more Media Gateway powered by the

same electrical panel.

Procedure 18

Grounding Media Gateways powered by the same electrical panel

1

Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet.

2

Install a #6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug, as shown in Figure 46 on page 148

, at the back of the Media Gateway to the ground bar.

3

Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 148 of 484

Installing system grounds

Figure 46

Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander ground lug location

Ground wire tie wrap lug

Ground wire to ground bar

Media Gateway to

Media Gateway Expander ground lugs

4

Test the ground.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing system grounds

Page 149 of 484

Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels

Follow Procedure 19 on page 149

to ground multiple Media Gateway that are powered by multiple electrical panels.

Procedure 19

Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels

1

Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet.

2

Identify the electrical panel powering each component.

3

Install a ground bar for each electrical panel identified above.

Note:

Each component must be grounded to the electrical panel that provides the power to that component.

4

Install a #6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug on the rear of the Media

Gateway to the ground bar identified for that component’s power source.

5

Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire.

6

Test the ground.

End of Procedure

Grounding a Media Gateway Expander

The Media Gateway Expander and the Media Gateway are considered as the same ground.

IMPORTANT!

Ground the Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway.

IMPORTANT!

Power each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander pair from the same electrical panel.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 150 of 484

Installing system grounds

Follow Procedure 20 to ground a Media Gateway Expander.

Procedure 20

Grounding a Media Gateway Expander

1

Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet.

2

Install a #6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug on the rear of the Media

Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway. See Figure 46 on page 148 .

3

Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire.

4

Test the ground.

End of Procedure

Grounding other rack-mounted components

To ground multiple pieces of equipment in a rack, use a separate ground connection from each piece of equipment to the ground bar. If a piece of data communications equipment in a rack does not have a grounding lug then ground the rack to the ground bar.

When the rack is grounded to the ground bar, the equipment is grounded

using the Single Point Grounding method, as shown in Figure 47 on page 151

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing system grounds

Page 151 of 484

Figure 47

Grounding multiple pieces of equipment in a rack

Terminal Server

Signaling Server

CS 1000E

Call Server

Media Gateway

Chassis

Media Gateway

Chassis Expansion

Grounding lug on back of chassis

Rack grounding block

Other data communications equipment with grounding lug

NTBK80 or NTDU6201 Ground Bar

553-CSE9027C

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 152 of 484

Installing system grounds

Grounding equipment in the UK

Follow Procedure 21 to ground equipment in the UK.

Procedure 21

Grounding equipment in the UK

1

Connect a protective and functional ground wire from the grounding strip on the Krone Test Jack Frame to the ground at the building entry point.

Use a green/yellow wire no thinner than 10 mm

2

.

Consider each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander pair as one ground.

2

Jumper the Media Gateway Expander ground to the Media Gateway

ground. See Figure 46 on page 148

.

3

In each Media Gateway:

a.

Connect a ground wire from the ground lug in the equipment to the ground connection at the Test Jack Frame. Use a green/yellow wire no thinner than 10 mm

2

.

b.

Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the grounding wire.

c.

Measure the resistance of the ground between the Krone Test Jack

Frame and the Media Gateway frame ground. The resistance must not be more than 0.25 Ohm.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

174

Page 153 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Connecting Server 0 to Server 1 (CP PIV, CP PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Installing Server cards and Gateway Controller cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Cabling the cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter onto a Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the ELAN subnet. . . . . . 171

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the TLAN subnet. . . . . . 172

Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Introduction

Several system connections are required to make the CS 1000E operational.

The CS 1000E must be connected to the Media Gateway through the ELAN subnet. The system’s components, such as the Servers and the Voice Gateway

Media Cards installed in the Media Gateway require both ELAN subnet and

TLAN subnet connections.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 22: "Connecting co-located Call Servers" on page 155

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 154 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

•

Procedure 23: "Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers" on page 155

•

Procedure 26: "Installing a DSP Daughterboard" on page 159

•

Procedure 24: "Installing the MGC card" on page 157

•

Procedure 28: "Installing the Server card (CP PM, CP DC)" on page 165

•

Procedure 29: "Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter" on page 170

•

Procedure 30: "Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet" on page 171

•

Procedure 31: "Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet" on page 172

•

Procedure 32: "Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander" on page 172 .

Connecting Server 0 to Server 1 (CP PIV, CP PM)

The CS 1000E redundant architecture allows for the separation of Server 0 and Server 1. The two processors are connected by either a direct 100BaseT crossover cable or a carefully engineered Layer 2/VLAN infrastructure.

Campus Redundancy provides the ability to separate the CS 1000E Call

Servers in a campus environment for “campus mirroring”. This feature enables two CP PM or two CP PIV Call Servers, one active and one redundant, to be connected through an Ethernet network interface. Campus

Redundancy can operate using any vendor’s Layer 2 Ethernet switching products. The distance depends upon network parameter limitations specified in Communication Server 1000: System Redundancy (NN43001-507).

To separate the redundant Call Servers, the ELAN subnet and the subnet of the High Speed Pipe (HSP) can be extended between the two processors with an Ethernet switch, using Layer 2 protocol.

If the two Servers are collocated, they can be connected using a standardshielded CAT5e or CAT6 crossover cable, limited to 100 meters in length.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 155 of 484

For detailed information on Campus Redundancy, refer to Communication

Server 1000: System Redundancy (NN43001-507).

The Layer 2 switch allows the ELAN subnet and the subnet of the High Speed

Pipe (HSP) to be extended between the two processors.

The method used to connect Server 0 toServer 1 depends on the proximity of

the units. If the units are co-located, follow Procedure 22 to connect the

Servers. If the units are configured for Campus Redundancy, follow

Procedure 23 to connect the Servers.

Connecting co-located Servers

Follow Procedure 22 to connect co-located CP PM or CP PIV Servers.

Procedure 22

Connecting co-located Call Servers

1

Plug one end of the CAT5E RJ-45 crossover cable (NTRC17) into the

HSP connector on the front of Server 0.

2

Plug the other end of the CAT5E RJ-45 NTRC17 crossover cable into the

HSP connector on the front of Server 1.

End of Procedure

Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers

The port-based VLANs used in the Layer 2 switches operate in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q tagging rules. VLAN ports are grouped into broadcast domains by assigning them to the same VLAN. Frames received in one

VLAN can be forwarded only within that VLAN. For more information, see

Communication Server 1000: System Redundancy (NN43001-507).

Procedure 23

Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers

1

Connect the CAT5E RJ-45 HSP port of Call Server 0 to a 100BaseT

ELAN network interface on the local Layer 2 switch.

2

Connect the CAT5E RJ-45 HSP port of Call Server 1 to a 100BaseT port on the remote Layer 2 switch.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 156 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

3

Link the two switches with two high-speed single-mode fiber uplinks (1

Gbps per link).

4

Assign three VLANs to the Layer 2 swtich ports.

• VLAN 1 – Default

• VLAN 2 – HSP

— Two ports connect CP PM card HSP ports in Call Server 0 and

Call Server 1.

— Four high-speed fiber uplinks (GBIC ports)

• VLAN 3 – ELAN

— Includes 2 ELAN network interfaces on the Call Servers, for example, for ELAN connections for Media Gateways, Call Pilot,

Symposium, Element Manager.

— Four high-speed fiber uplinks (GBIC ports)

End of Procedure

Installing Server cards and Gateway Controller cards

Server cards and Gateway Controller cards are circuit cards for use in a CS

1000E Media Gateway. The following sections describe the installation of

Server cards and Gateway Controller cards. Preform the installation procedures appropriate for your hardware.

Gateway Controller installation

The Gateway Controller resides in slot 0 of a Media Gateway. The Gateway

Controller can be a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card, Common

Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card, or Media Gateway Extended

Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card.

Note: The MG XPEC card can only be installed in a Large System

UEM. For more information about MG XPEC card installation, see

“Media Gateway Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG

XPEC)” on page 99

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 157 of 484

Perform the following procedure to install an MGC card into a Media

Gateway.

Procedure 24

Installing the MGC card

1

Insert the MGC into Slot 0 of the Media Gateway.

2

Connect the 3-port SDI cable (NTBK48AA) to the SDI0 port on the

Chassis.

Note:

The 3-port SDI cable (NTBK48AA) is not required for an MGC installation in an MG 1010 chassis. The MG 1010 MGU card provides the serial connection. Use an RJ45 to 9 pin RS232 serial port cable when

cabling a MG 1010. For more information, see “Serial port connectivity” on page 74

.

3

Power on the Media Gateway.

• MGC display will read

BOOT

.

• Power on self-test will begin. MGC display will read

POST

.

• If self-test completes successfully, MGC display changes to

PASS.

otherwise, an error code

Exxx

is displayed.

• The MGC begins loading application software. Display changes to

LOAD

.

End of Procedure

Perform the following procedure to install a CP MG card into a Media

Gateway

Procedure 25

Installing the CP MG card

1

Ensure that the security dongle is inserted on the CP MG card.

2

Insert and slide the CP MG card into Slot 0 of a Media Gateway.

3

Lock the card in place with the faceplate latches.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 158 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

4

Connect the serial cable:

Note:

The NTC325AAE6 serial port adapter kit is required.

• Connect a CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable to the TTY1 port on the

CP MG faceplate.

• Connect a NTC326AAE6 serial port adapter (9 pin or 25 pin) to the other end of the CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable.

• Connect the CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable with adapter to a serial port on a maintenance terminal. If you require a longer cable to reach your maintenance terminal, you can attach a standard serial port cable to the adapter for extended cable length.

5

Configure the maintenance terminal for VT-100 emulation, 9600 bps,

8-N-1.

The Gateway Controller portion of the CP MG card is ready to configure.

The CP MG card functions as a Server and a Gateway Controller. Perform the following steps to connect the Server portion of the CP MG card to the CS

1000E network.

6

Connect the ELAN cable:

• Connect one end of a shielded CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable to the

1E (ELAN) port on the CP MG faceplate.

• Connect the other end of the cable to the ELAN subnet of the

CS 1000E network.

7

Connect the TLAN cable:

• Connect one end of a shielded CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable to the

2T (TLAN) port on the CP MG faceplate.

• Connect the other end of the cable to the TLAN subnet of the

CS 1000E network.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 159 of 484

8

Power on the Media Gateway.

• CP MG display will read

BOOT

.

• Power on self-test will begin. CP MG display will read

POST

.

• If self-test completes successfully, CP MG display changes to

PASS.

otherwise, an error code

Exxx

is displayed.

• The CP MG begins loading application software. Display changes to

LOAD

.

End of Procedure

Installing a Media Gateway Controller DSP Daughterboard

The MGC card provides two expansion slots for Digital Signal Processor

(DSP) daughterboards (DB). You must install the DSP DB on the MGC card before installing the MGC card into the Media Gateway.

Note: The CP MG card and MG XPEC card contain non-removable

DSP resources.

The following procedure describes how to install a DSP DB on an MGC card:

Procedure 26

Installing a DSP Daughterboard

1

Place the MGC card on a safe ESD surface.

2

Place the DSP DB in either DB position 1, position 2, or both, depending on how the Daughterboards will be configured. The MGC card supports the DB-32, DB-96 and DB-128 Daughterboards.

3

Ensure the DSP DB is securely attached to the MGC (using the four supplied screws and standoffs).

End of Procedure

Configuring the Gateway Controller (mgcsetup)

Note: Avaya recommends that you configure the MGC with ELAN security disabled and then enable it after the device is configured and registered with the Call Server.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 160 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

To configure the Gateway Controller in Element Manager, initial configuration of the Gateway Controller must be completed through the command line first using mgcsetup ( see

Procedure 27 on page 160

).

There are 3 ways to enter mgcsetup

:

• If no IP information exists on the Gateway Controller, it boots directly into the setup menu

• If IP information does exist, the prompt

Press any key to stop auto-boot and enter mgcsetup

… appears

• mgcsetup

may be entered as a shell command

Note: The Gateway Controller ships with “gold” software in onboard flash memory. This is upgraded automatically if centralized software upgrade is enabled on the Call Server. It can be upgraded manually through LD 143.

You can access the MGC setup after you telnet into one of the following shells:

•

<CTRL> OAM

, (provide OAM username and password to access OAM shell)

•

<CTRL> LDB

, (provide LDB username and password to access LDB shell)

•

<CTRL> PDT

, (provide PDT username and password to access PDT shell)

Procedure 27

Configuring the Gateway Controller (mgcsetup)

Note:

All entered parameter values for this procedure are examples only.

1

Enter network IP information at the mgcsetup menu.

Note:

You must configure the TLAN with Element Manager on current

MGC loadware. TLAN configuration information only appears if lthe oadware on the MGC card is older than the MGCBAD loadware.

Please define the data networking parameters for this

MG 1000E now.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 161 of 484

Hostname: MGC_N313 (optional)

ELAN IP: 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.33

ELAN subnet mask: 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

ELAN gateway IP: 192.168.3.1

Primary CS IP: 192.168.3.32

Enter port and security parameters. if required:

ELAN security = “ISec,” based on IPSec standard. Must be configured on every component expected to communicate across the ELAN, or not configured at all. There are 4 options:

• None - no security used

• Opti - optimal: XMsg + PbxLink ports.

• Func - functional: all ELAN communication between node components is secured, but external communication (eg: Call Pilot, maintenance PC) is not.

• Full - all communication uses ISec. Exceptions are SSL & SSH

(already encrypted), NTP (has its own authentication method) and

AML (legacy support requires unsecured link).

Change MGC advanced parameters? (y/[n]) : y

TLAN is set to auto negotiate, change? (y/[n]) : y

Note: Turning off auto negotiate on the TLAN

: will default it to 100Mbps full duplex.

Set TLAN to auto negotiate? ([y]/n) : y

ELAN is set to auto negotiate, change? (y/[n]) : y

Note: Turning off auto negotiate on the ELAN

: will default it to 100Mbps full duplex.

Set ELAN to auto negotiate? ([y]/n) : y

ELAN security Disabled, change? (y/[n]) : n

Note: Spaces ~ * ` @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.

Please input PSK(16-32 chars): (input is not echoed)

Strength of PSK: Weak

Please reenter PSK(16-32 chars): (input is not echoed)

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 162 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Set MGC to TDM only? (y/[n]) : n

Note: Turning on TDM only will not allow

: the MGC to be connected to a network.

2

Review the network information and enter “y” to confirm.

You have entered the following parameters for this MG

1000E:

Hostname : MGC_N313

ELAN IP : 192.168.3.33

ELAN subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

ELAN gateway IP : 192.168.3.1

TLAN IP : 192.168.19.33

TLAN subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

TLAN gateway IP : 192.168.19.1

Primary CS Hostname : CS1000E_N313

Primary CS IP : 192.168.3.32

Alternate CS 1 Hostname :

Alternate CS 1 IP : 0.0.0.0

Alternate CS 2 Hostname :

Alternate CS 2 IP : 0.0.0.0

TLAN set to auto negotiate.

ELAN set to auto negotiate.

ELAN security Enabled, level is Optimized Security

Is this correct? (y/n/[a]bort) : y

3

IP changes require a reboot. Enter “y” at the prompt

.

Do you want to continue? (y/n/[a]bort) : y reboot(-1) has been called...

After reboot, the Gateway Controller connects to the Server and downloads the remaining configuration information.

If centralized software upgrade has been enabled, the Gateway Controller will register and upgrade its software by downloading it from the Server.

After the software has been upgraded, another reboot will be triggered.

After reboot, the Gateway Controller registers to the Server and the LED displays the superloop and shelf (eg: 4 0) of the Media Gateway. If registration fails, it shows “UNRG.”

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 163 of 484

If the card does not register, disable sFTP by issuing the following command in LD 117:

DIS TRANSFERS SECURE

Rebooting the MGC

The MGC reboots and registers with the Call Server.

Found device : INTEL 82365SL

Engcode:NTDW60BA REL 08

ELAN mac address is:00:13:65:ff:ee:ed

TLAN mac address is:00:13:65:ff:ee:ec

RESET reason: Hard Reset.

Daughter board 1:NTDW62AA R02 00:13:65:ff:f8:fd.

Daughter board 2:NOT INS

VxWorks System Boot

Copyright 1984-2005 Wind River Systems, Inc.

CPU: Chagall

Version: VxWorks5.5.1

Bootcode version: MGCBAA20 auto-booting...

Loading MSP from CF...1375736

Booting ARM0 (MSP) at 0x00000100 ...

Loading CSP from CF...6643712 + 5849088

Booting ARM1 (CSP) at 0x80010000 ...

Found device : INTEL 82365SL

Loading symbol table from /p/mainos.sym ...done

Loadware upgrade

If the MGC loadware is out of date (compared to the loadware on the Call

Server), an upgrade of the loadware occurs based on the Centralized Upgrade setting defined during the software install and the values set in LD 143. The default values are set so that the upgrade starts automatically once registration is achieved with the Call Server.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 164 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

There are six pieces of loadware that are updated on the MGC. These updates are downloaded from the Call Server.

-> Received an upgrade request. Preparing MGC for upgrade.

Auto commit option has been enabled.

Upgrade of CSP loadware initiated.

OMM: IP link is UP between Primary Call Server and MGC 1

Upgrade of MSP loadware initiated.

Upgrade of APP loadware initiated.

Upgrade of FPGA loadware initiated.

Upgrade of DBL1 initiated.

-> 0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst):

Upgrading FPGA Loadware...

logTask: 1 log messages lost.

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Programming FPGA ...

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): FPGA Upgrade completed.

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Upgrading Application Loadware ...

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Gold CSP image upgraded

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): mgcBootLineFix:fixing the bootline

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Upgrade Application Loadware completed

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Rebooting MGC to take the upgrade in effect.

At this point configured Media Gateways synchronize with the Call Server.

Each Media Gateway IP address must be configured in overlay 97. For more information, see Communication Server 1000E Software Upgrades

(NN43041-458).

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 165 of 484

Installing the Server card

The following procedure describes how to install the CP PM or CP DC server card in a Media Gateway.

Note: Ensure that the CP PM DIP switch is set correctly. The DIP switch determines whether the CP PM boots from a hard drive or compact flash.

For the CP PM Server, the S5 dip switch should be set to position 0.

For CS 1000 Release 7.0, CP PM cards must have a minimum of 2 GBytes of memory and a 40 GB disk drive. If you need to upgrade either the memory or hard drive on a CP PM card, see Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311).

Procedure 28

Installing the Server card (CP PM, CP DC)

1

Ensure that the security dongle (the one that comes as part of the software kit) is inserted on the Server.

2

Insert the Server card:

• Slide the Server card into Slot 1 (or higher) of the Media Gateway.

• Slide the Server card into Slot 22 or 23 of the MG 1010 chassis.

3

Lock the card into the faceplate latches.

4

Connect the serial cable:

• On a Media Gateway, attach the SDI cable. The 50-pin Amphenol connects the back of the chassis, to the port that corresponds to the slot that you placed the Server card.

• On an MG 1010, attach the RJ45 to 9 pin RS232 serial cable to tty0 or tty1 port on the MGU card. tty0 is for slot 22, tty1 is for slot 23.

• Server cards in slots 1-10 require the NTAK19EC 2-port SDI cable for serial connections.

• Connect the other end of the serial cable to the serial port on the maintenence terminal.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 166 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Figure 48

2-port SDI cable (NTAK19EC) cable

End of Procedure

Cabling the cards

The following sections describe the process required to cable Gateway

Controller and Server cards.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 167 of 484

Cabling the MGC card

The 3-port SDI cable (NTBK48AA) is connected to the SDI (RS-232) port on

the Media Gateway. Figure 49 on page 168 shows front of MGC. The CE and

CT ports are reserved for connections to the Server card. The CE connects to the ELAN port of the Server. The 1E and 2T ports must be attached to the

Layer 2 Ethernet switch.

For MG1010 you must connect to the MGU card for serial port connections.

MGC Ethernet Capabilities

An MGC features six Ethernet interfaces set to auto-negotiate by default: four

on the faceplate (see Figure 49 on page 168 ), and two on the back. For details,

see Appendix A: “Supported cabling options.” on page 469 .

Cabling the CP MG card

The CP MG card provides two serial port connections on the CP MG faceplate. An NTC325AAE6 serial port adapter kit is required to connect a

9-pin or 25-pin serial cable to the RJ-45 connector on the faceplate.

The CP MG card provides four external Ethernet connections. Two connections are on the faceplate, and two connections are on the backplane.

The two faceplate Ethernet ports (1E, 2T) provide TLAN and ELAN connections.

The CP MG Server and Gateway Controller components are connected internally through the embedded Ethernet switch on the CP MG card. The

Server and Gateway Controller are co-located on the motherboard of the

CP MG card, therefore you do not require any external cabling to establish IP data links between the CP MG Server and the Gateway Controller.

For more information on connecting the CP MG cables, see Procedure 25 on page 157

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 168 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Connecting the Servers to a Media Gateway

A Media Gateway performs functions determined by the CS 1000E Server.

The Media Gateway detects stimulus events from its interface cards and passes these events to the Server, where the high-level call processing decisions are made.

The NTBK48AA 3-port SDI cable connects to the SDI port on the Cabinet.

Figure 49 on page 168

shows front of MGC card with the "bulkhead" connectors (1E and 2T) that connect to numbers 1 and 2 bulkhead. The CE and CT connect to the ELAN port. The 100 Base T ports 1 and 2 connect to the bulkhead, while ports 1 and 2 in the lower left connect to the backplane.

Figure 49

MGC faceplate

CE: ELAN

Dedicated for

CS

1E: ELAN

Dual homed with

Backplane E

CT: TLAN

Dedicated for

CS

2T: TLAN

Dual homed with

Backplane T

Note: The Media Gateway can be connected directly to the ELAN subnet, or it can be connected to the ELAN subnet through a Layer 2

Ethernet switch.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 169 of 484

Cabling the Server

In a typical configuration, the com (SDI) port of the Server is routed through the backplane of the Media Gateway to the 50-pin Amphinol connector on the back of the shelf. An NTAK19EC cable ships with the Server that adapts the

50-pin Amphinol to a 25-pin DB connector. Port 0 is used for maintenance access, and Port 1 is for an external modem connection.

In an MG 1010, the MGU provides a the serial connections to the Server card in slot 22 and slot 23. Connect an RJ42 to 9 pin RS232 serial cable to MGU port tty0 or tty1. tty0 is for slot 22, tty1 is for slot 23. The NTAK19EC cable is required for any Server cards installed in slots 1-10.

Connect the ELAN of the Server, or LAN 1 of the CP PIV Call Server, to the

CE port of the MGC card or to the VLAN of the Layer 2 Ethernet switch that is dedicated to ELAN traffic for the system.

Appendix A: “Supported cabling options.” on page 469 illustrates the

different ways to connect the Call Servers, Gateway Controllers, and

Signaling Server cards.

Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter onto a Media Card

The Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter shown in Figure 50

provides access to the TLAN and ELAN Ethernet Ports. The adapter breaks out the signals from the I/O connector to the following:

• ELAN (management) network interface

• TLAN (telephony) network interface

• one RS-232 (local console) port

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 170 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Figure 50

Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter

TLAN RJ-45

LAN socket

ELAN RJ-45

LAN socket

RS-232 Connector

Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port

Identification Label

50-pin connector

Procedure 29

Inserting a Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter

1

Open the Media Card package NTDU41CA.

2

Remove the Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter.

3

Save the other items from the package for use in “Installing a Compact

Flash (CF) card” on page 350

.

4

Insert the adapter, shown in Figure 50, into the connector Card 1, Card 2,

Card 3, or Card 4 that corresponds to the location of the Media Card.

For example, in Figure 51 on page 171

, the Media Card is installed in card slot 1. Therefore, the adaptor is installed in connector Card 1.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 171 of 484

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the ELAN subnet

Follow Procedure 30 to connect a Voice Gateway Media Card to the ELAN.

Procedure 30

Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet

1

Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the ELAN network interface on

the Adaptor (Figure 51 on page 171

).

2

Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ-45

ELAN network interface on the Layer 2 Ethernet switch.

Figure 51

Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter on the Media Gateway

TLAN

ELAN

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 172 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Connecting a Voice Gateway Media Card to the TLAN subnet

Follow Procedure 31 to connect a Voice Gateway Media Card to the TLAN

subnet.

Procedure 31

Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet

1

Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the TLAN network interface on

the adaptor (see Figure 51 on page 171

).

2

Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ-45

TLAN network interface on the Layer2 Ethernet switch.

End of Procedure

Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander

Procedure 32 describes how to connect a Media Gateway Expander to the

MG 1000E. The Media Gateway Expander Cable Kit (NTDK89) contains two NTDK95 cables used to connect the Media Gateway Expander to the MG

1000E. One cable provides DS-30X connectivity while the second cable provides CE-MUX connectivity to slot 10 only.

Note: The MG 1010 does not require or support a Media Gateway

Expander.

Procedure 32

Connecting a MG 1000E to a Media Gateway Expander

1

Connect the non-labeled side of NTDK95 cable to the CE-MUX connector at the back of the MG 1000E and labeled side of NTDK95(labeled as

Expansion Cabinet DS-30/CE-MUX Conn) to the CE-MUX connector at the back of the Media Gateway Expander.

2

Tighten the screws on the connectors.

3

Connect the other NTDK95 cable(non-labeled side) to the DS-30X connector at the back of the MG 1000E and labeled side of

NTDK95(labeled as Expansion Cabinet DS-30/CE-MUX Conn) to the

DS-30X connector at the back of the Media Gateway Expander.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

Page 173 of 484

4

Tighten the screws on the connectors. Figure 52 on page 173

shows the

MG 1000E and Media Gateway Expander connected with the two

NTDK95 cables.

Note:

The NTDK95 cable is a uni-directional cable with a ferrite bead at one end that needs to be terminated on the expansion cabinet end. The

NTDK95 cable direction can be identified by the label on the cable. This label must be installed at the expansion cabinet end.

Figure 52

MG 1000E and Media Gateway Expander connections

DS-30X connector

NTDK95 cables

CE-MUX connector

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 174 of 484

Installing and connecting CS 1000E hardware

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

226

Page 175 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Software Install Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Creating a Call Processor software Compact Flash card . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Reconfigure I/O ports and call registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Testing the Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Install the software on the second Call Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configuring primary and secondary call server IP addresses . . . . . 207

Verifying Call Server 0 is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Making the system redundant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Complete the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Configuring the Media Gateway zone and IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Initial configuration of the Gateway Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Rebooting the MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Loadware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Introduction

This chapter provides local software installation information for

Communication Server 1000E Standard Availabilty and High Availability

(CP PIV and CP PM) VxWorks-based systems. For information about

Linux-based software installations, or Deployment Manager remote software installations, see Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 176 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Commissioning (NN43001-315). For information about Co-resident Call

Server and Signaling Server systems, see Co-resident Call Server and

Signaling Server Fundamentals (NN43001-509).

Software Install Kit

The Software Install Kit required to install CP PM and CP PIV contains 3

Compact Flash (CF) cards:

1

The 128MB RMD is used to backup the call server database

2

The software installation RMD contains the following:

a

CS 1000E Release 7.0 software

b

keycode files

c

CS 1000E Release 7.0 Dependency List (PEPs) for Large and Small systems

d

default database (if initiated during the installation)

3

The 1GB FMD is the hard drive for the VxWorks-based CP PM Call

Server.

Note:

The 1GB CF FMD is required for a VxWorks-based SA or HA CP

PM configuration.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 177 of 484

IMPORTANT!

Systems and components delivered to customer sites may include preinstalled software. However, the pre-installed software versions are typically older and are included only for manufacturing and order management purposes. Do not attempt to operate the system with

the pre-installed software. You must download the latest software from the Nortel Software Download web site and install the software as part of the installation process.

Creating a Call Processor software Compact Flash card

The RMD installation CF card ships pre-formatted and bootable from Nortel.

If the Nortel CF card does not boot, you can make it bootable by performing

Procedure 33 on page 178

.

For VxWorks based CP PIV and CP PM cards, see Appendix B for supported media and memory sizes. USB devices are not supported.

Note: Nortel does not provide support for customer provided CF cards.

See Appendix B for supported media and memory sizes.

Perform the following procedure to create a bootable Call Server software CF card.

CAUTION — Data Loss

The PC utility used in the following procedure

(mkbootrmd.bat) does not validate whether the drive letter entered is a valid RMD or the size of the media.

You must enter the correct drive letter when prompted or risk formatting the incorrect drive.

Note:

This utility is supported by all versions of

Microsoft Windows.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 178 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Procedure 33

Creating a bootable Call Server software CF card

1

Download the latest software load zip file for your platform type (CP PIV,

CP PM) from the Nortel website to a folder on your PC.

2

Navigate to the folder on your PC where you downloaded the file.

3

Extract all the files to a temporary folder. Unzip the Call Server software load zip file to create the following six directories :

• \backup

• \install

• \keycode

• \licenses

• \swload

• \utilities

4

Insert the CF card into the PC

.

5

Click on My Computer icon to verify the drive letter assigned to the CF

drive, see Figure 53 on page 179

.

In this example, the CF card is assigned to drive letter F.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 53

Verify CF card drive letter

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 179 of 484

6

Navigate to the folder on your local PC where you unzipped the Call

Server software load files.

7

Open the Utilities directory and locate the mkbootrmd.bat file, see Figure

54 on page 180

.

The mkbootrmd batch file can format the CF card and make the CF card bootable.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 180 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 54 mkbootrmd.bat folder

8

Double-click mkbootrmd.bat file to start the application.

The warning screen is shown, see Figure 55 on page 181 . Press any key

to continue.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 55 mkbootrmd.bat

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 181 of 484

9

Enter the drive letter assigned to your RMD, see Figure 56 on page 182

.

Use the CF card drive letter assigned from your PC that you verified in

step 5.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 182 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

IMPORTANT!

The mkbootrmd.bat file does not verify the drive assignment. It is possible to format other drives on the PC or Laptop.

Figure 56 mkbootrmd.bat RMD selection

10 Press Enter to create a bootable Call Server CF card. The CF card

formats and the system copies files, see Figure 57 on page 183 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 57 mkbootrmd.bat creation

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 183 of 484

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 184 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

11 The boot sector files (bootrom.sys and nvram.sys) are successfully

copied making the RMD bootable. Press any key to continue, see Figure

58 on page 184

.

Figure 58 mkbootrmd.bat boot sector successfully installed

12 Verify the following message is shown:

”All the specified files are contiguous”.

If this message is not shown, repeat this procedure starting from step 8.

Note: This message indicates that the RMD formatting process is successful and the CF card is now ready to load the Call Server software and system components..

13 Press any key to close the mkbootrmd.bat program.

14 Click My Computer to verify the CF drive is renamed to CS1000BOOT,

see Figure 59 on page 185 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 59

CS1000BOOT drive name

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 185 of 484

Figure 60

CF card boot files

15 Double-click the CF drive to verify that it contains the bootrom.sys and

nvram.sys files, see Figure 60 on page 185

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 186 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

16 Navigate the folder on your PC that contains the Call Server software load folders and files.

17 Copy all the folders to the CF card.

Note: This can take upto 12 minutes depending on the speed of the computer. The files are copied from the hard drive on the local PC to the

CF card in the CF drive.

When all subfolders and files are copied successfully to the CF card, it can be used to install or upgrade the software on a Call Server.

18 Remove the CF card from the CF drive and label it appropriately.

An example for a label is, Call Processor, CS-x.xx.xx, where x.xx.xx represents the Call Server software version.

End of Procedure

Installing the software

This section provides the steps involved in the local installion of VxWorks based CS 1000 software.

Perform the following procedure to install the software on the Call Server.

Procedure 34

Installing the software on the Call Server

1

Connect the terminal to SDI0 with the NTAK19EC cable.

2

Insert the CF card into the Call Server faceplate.

3

Reboot the card by pressing the RST button on the faceplate of the Call

Server or power up the chassis.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 187 of 484

4

For CP PM version 1 cards, once prompted (see Figure 61), Press F to

“force board to boot from faceplate drive” (prompt may appear twice if booting a CP PM card that has had software previously installed).

For CP PM version 2 cards (NTDW66CAE5/E6; NTDW99CAE5/E6),

press F immediately after the card starts to boot (see Figure 62) to load

the boot action menu. The prompt will be replaced by [Entering boot action menu] in acknowledgement. When the memory test completes, the

boot action menu displays (see Figure 63 on page 188 ). Using the cursor

keys, move the highlight to the Faceplate RMD row and press Enter to boot from the faceplate CF card.

Figure 61

CP PM version 1 boot sequence

Figure 62

CP PM version 2 boot prompt

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 188 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 63

CP PM version 2 boot action menu

The VxWorks banner screen appears (see Figure 64 on page 189

). Press enter to continue.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 64

VxWorks banner

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 189 of 484

5

Press y for both software warnings to proceed with the installation.

Note: The warnings appear but can be ignored for new installations. PE/

EPE is not applicable for this installation. Upgrade warnings are not applicable because you are performing a new system installation.

A disk check occurs and the following information appears:

>Obtaining and checking system configuration ...

>Validate hard disk partitions

Validate number of hard drive partitions and size ...

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 190 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

The size of partition /p is 0 Mb:

Disk check failed: the disk is not correctly partitioned

INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition "/u"

errNo : 0xd0003

Please press <CR> when ready ...

INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition "/p"

Please press <CR> when ready ...

INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition "/e"

Please press <CR> when ready ...

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!

The Fix Media Device on Core 0 is blank.

Install cannot continue unless the FMD is partitioned.

Note: INSTALL WILL REBOOT AFTER THIS PROCEDURE AND FIX

MEDIA WILL BE EMPTY AFTER YOU PARTITION IT. INSTALL

REMOVABLE MEDIA MUST BE IN THE DRIVE AT THIS TIME.

Please enter:

<CR> -> <a> - Partition the Fix Media Device.

<> -

Enter choice>

6

Press a or <CR> to partition the fixed media device. The partitions are formatted and the system reboots.

7

Once prompted, Press F to force board to boot from the faceplate drive

(see Figure 61, Figure 62, and Figure 63 on page 188

) and continue with the installation.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 191 of 484

The VxWorks banner screen appears (see Figure 65 on page 191

). Press enter to continue.

Figure 65

VxWorks banner

8

Press y for both software warnings to proceed with the installation.

Note: The warnings appear but can be ignored for new installations. PE/

EPE is not applicable for this installation. Upgrade warnings are not applicable because you are performing a new system installation.

A disk check occurs, the FMD is ready for software installation.

The Software Installation Tool Main Menu appears (see Figure 66 on page 192 ).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 192 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 66

Software Installation Tool Main Menu

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 67

Keycode files

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 193 of 484

9

Press u or <CR> to access the Install Menu (keycode authorization). The

following screen appears (see Figure 67 on page 193

).

Note:

If your keycode files reside on a separate CF card, remove the software installation CF card and insert the CF card containing the keycode files. Typically the keycode files reside in the keycode folder of the software installation CF card .

The system searches for available keycode files in the keycode directory of the

CF card.

10 The keycode file(s) appear in a list. Select the appropriate keycode file for this system and install the keycode.

Note 1:

A maximum of 20 keycode files can be stored under the

“keycode” directory on the RMD. The keycode files must have the same extension “.kcd”.

Note 2:

If the CF card was exchanged, insert the CF card containing CS

1000 Release 7.0.

11 The system validates the selected keycode and displays the software release and machine type authorized. Press <CR> or y to confirm that the

keycode matches the system software on the RMD (see Figure 67 on page 193

and Figure 68 on page 194

).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 194 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 68

Keycode confirmation

Figure 69

Install Menu

12 The Install Menu appears (see Figure 69 on page 194

). Press b to install the software, database, and CP-BOOTROM. Option b allows you to either install the default database or choose to install a preconfigured customer database.

The following screen appears (see Figure 70 on page 195 ):

13 Press <CR> or y to confirm that the call processor is set to side 0 or press

n if you need to change the side to side 1.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 70

Side information

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 195 of 484

14 The location information screen appears (see Figure 71 on page 195

), indicating that the call processor is located in loop 0 and shelf 0 of the

IPMG. Press <CR> or y to confirm their location. If you need to change loop or shelf information, press n and follow the prompts.

Figure 71

Call processor location

15 Ensure the CF card containing CS 1000 Release 7.0 installation software

is installed in the drive and press <CR> or a(see Figure 72 on page 196 ).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 196 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 72

Insert RMD

16 Press <CR> or y to confirm that you have the correct software version

(see Figure 73 on page 196

).

Figure 73

Confirm software version

17 Press <CR> or y to install dependency lists and continue with the upgrade

(see Figure 74 on page 197

).

Note:

If Dependency Lists are not installed on media, the following

prompts do not appear. Proceed to step 18 on page 197

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 74

Install Dependency Lists

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 197 of 484

18 Press <CR> or y (the default) to enable the Automatic Centralized

Software Upgrade (CSU) feature (see Figure 75 on page 197

).

Figure 75

Centralized Software Upgrade

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 198 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

19 Set the CSU feature to Sequential. Press <CR> or y (see Figure 76 on page 198 ).

Note:

if Sequential is selected

<1>

, the Media Gateway installations are performed across the LAN in a sequential manner. One Media Gateway is installed at a time. No other Media Gateway installations are initiated until the current Media Gateway completes its installation.

If Simultaneous is selected

<2>

, the Media Gateway installations are performed simultaneously across the LAN. Up to eight Media Gateways are installed at the same time. If there are more than eight Media

Gateways, the installation of the next Media Gateway begins after the installation of one Media Gateway is complete. The following warning is presented to the installer:

WARNING:

Call Processing is not guaranteed to operate on the call server during simultaneous upgrades.

Do you wish to proceed? (y/n)

Figure 76

Automatic Centralized Software Upgrade Mode

20 The PSDL Installation Menu appears (see Figure 77 on page 199

). Select the appropriate location based on your geographical location.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 199 of 484

Figure 77

The PSDL Installation Menu

Once you select a geographic location, the PSDL, loadware and language files are installed.

21 The Installation Status Summary screen appears (see Figure 78 on page 200 ). Verify the parameters and press <CR> when ready.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 200 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 78

Installation Status Summary

Figure 79

Install Tool

22 Press <CR> or y to begin the installation (see Figure 79 on page 200 ).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 201 of 484

The installation process begins.

A message appears indicating that the installation on Core 0 was successful

(see Figure 80 on page 201

).

Figure 80

Core 0 software installation complete

23 Press <CR> to continue. The following screen appears (see Figure 81 on page 201 ).

Figure 81

Database installation

24 Select the database you wish to install. If you are installing a previously programmed customer database, select option a. If you are installing the default database and accounts prior to programming, then selection option b.

25 A confirmation appears. Verify that it is the correct database and press a

or <CR> (see Figure 82 on page 202 ).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 202 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Figure 82

Default database installation

26 The Installation Status Summary screen appears, indicating that the

installation was a success (see Figure 83 on page 202 ). Press <CR> to

continue.

Figure 83

Installation Status Summary

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 84

Install Menu

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 203 of 484

27 The Install Menu appears (see Figure 84 on page 203

). Press q to quit the

Install Tool.

Figure 85

Quit Install Tool

28 Press <CR> or y to confirm your selection (see Figure 85).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 204 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

29 Press <CR> or y to reboot the system (see Figure 86). Once the system

has completed its reboot, remove the CF from the faceplate.

Figure 86

System reboot

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 205 of 484

Reconfigure I/O ports and call registers

Procedure 35

Reconfiguring I/O ports and call registers

1

Evaluate the number of call registers and 500 telephone buffers that are configured for the system (suggested minimum values are 4500 and 1000 respectively). If changes are required, reconfigure the values in LD 17:

LD 17

REQ CHG

TYPE PARM

500B 1000

NCR 20000

Load program

Change

Use 2000 as a minimum value

Use 35000 as a minimum value.

Press enter until you are returned to the REQ prompt.

Exit program

****

Note:

For these changes to take effect the customer must save the data (LD 43, EDD and then INI the active core).

2

Print the Configuration Record to confirm the changes made in Step 1:

LD 22

REQ PRT

TYPE CFN

****

Load program

Set the print option

Print the configuration

Exit program

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 206 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Testing the Call Server

Note: Before performing the testing procedures below, the database must be programmed, the system must be configured, and the installation must be completed.

Procedure 36

Testing the Call Server

1

Verify that the Call Server is active.

LD 135

STAT CPU

Load program

Get the status of the CPUs

2

Check dial-tone.

3

Verify that the Call Server is active, redundant, and single.

4

Make internal, external, and network calls.

5

Check attendant console activity.

6

Check IP Peer networking for incoming and outgoing calls.

7

Check applications (CallPilot, Symposium, and so on).

End of Procedure

Install the software on the second Call Server

Procedure 37

Installing the software on the second Call Server

Complete the steps in Procedure 34 on page 186

for the second Call Server.

Please note the following:

• the second Call Server must be side 1 and must be assigned a different Loop

• it is recommended that the second Call Server be in a second chassis

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 207 of 484

Configuring primary and secondary call server IP addresses

Procedure 38

Configuring primary and secondary call server IP addresses

Given: Primary IP address: 47.1.1.10 ; Secondary IP address: 47.1.1.11;

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway IP: 47.1.1.1

1

Load Overlay 117

2

Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:

NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP 47.1.1.10

NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

3

Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands:

CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP

CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY_IP (for Dual CPU only)

Verify your IP address for Ethernet by entering the PRT ENLK command.

Note:

To reuse the active host entry and/or associated IP address, the existing entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing enty, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. Out the original host entry, then proceed to Step 2.

4

Set up Ethernet subnet mask. Enter the command:

CHG MASK 255.255.255.0

Verify subnet mask setting by entering the command:

PRT MASK

5

Set up routing entry. Enter the command:

NEW ROUTE 0.0.0.0 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

Where: 0.0.0.0 = destination network IP and 47.1.1.1 = default gateway IP

Note:

When more than one gateway exists, replace 0.0.0.0 with the destination network address for each entry of the routing table.

6

Verify default routing by entering the command:

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 208 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

PRT ROUTE

Note 1:

For a single CPU machine, the secondary IP is not used.

Note 2:

The secondary IP is accessible only when a system is in split mode.

Note 3:

The subnet mask must be the same value used for the system

Ethernet network.

Note 4:

The system private Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used for system access and control. Use an internet gateway to isolate the system private

Ethernet from the Customer Enterprise Network.

Note 5:

Routing information is required if an internet gateway or router connects a system private network (ELAN subnet) to the Customer

Enterprise Network. New routes use network IPV4 classification to determine whether the route is network or host-based. INI is required for the activation of subnet Mask.

End of Procedure

Verifying Call Server 0 is active

Use the following commands to verify that Call Server 0 is active.

LD 135

STAT CPU

CFN

Load program

Get the status of the CPUs

Making the system redundant

At this point, Core/Net 0 is ready to be synchronized with Core/Net 1.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 209 of 484

Procedure 39

Making the system redundant

1

Check to see if the HSP cable is attached. If not, attach the HSP cable

(this is a crossover cable) to the CP PM faceplate connectors on both

CP PM cards.

2

Make the system redundant in LD 135 by typing the command JOIN..

LD 135

JOIN

****

Restores redundancy to a system put in single mode by the SPLIT command

Exit the program

3

Once the synchronization of memories and drives is complete, STAT the

CPU and verify that the CPUs are in a true redundant state.

LD 135

STAT CPU

****

Get status of CPU and memory

Exit the program

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 210 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

.stat cpu cp 0 16 PASS -- STDBY

TRUE REDUNDANT

DISK STATE = REDUNDANT

HEALTH = 20

VERSION = Mar 3 2005, 16:26:40

Side = 0, DRAM SIZE = 512 MBytes cp 1 16 PASS -- ENBL

TRUE REDUNDANT

DISK STATE = REDUNDANT

HEALTH = 20

VERSION = Mar 3 2005, 16:26:40

Side = 1, DRAM SIZE = 512 MBytes

4

Tier 1 and Tier 2 health of both Call Servers must be identical in order to successfully switch service from Call Server 1 to Call Server 0.

LD 135

STAT HEALTH

Get status of CPU and memory

****

Exit the program

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 211 of 484

.stat health

Local (Side 0, Active, Redundant):

Components without TIER 1 Health contribution:

=================================================

disp 0 15 1:In Service

sio2 0 15 1:In Service

cp 0 16:In Service

ipb 0:In Service

TIER 1 Health Count Breakdown:

=====================================

sio8 0 16 1: 0002

sio8 0 16 2: 0002

sutl 0 15: 0002

strn 0 15: 0002

xsmp 0 15 1: 0002

eth 0 16 0: 0002

Local TIER 1 Health Total: 20

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 212 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

TIER 2 Health Count Breakdown:

=======================================

ELAN 16 IP : 47.11.138.150 Health = 2

ELAN 17 IP : 47.11.138.153 Health = 2

Local AML over ELAN Total Health:4

Local Total IPL Health = 6

IPL connection history:3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

3 3 3 3 3 3

Local TIER 2 Health Total:10

Remote (Side 1, Inactive, Redundant):

Components without TIER 1 Health contribution:

disp 1 15 1:In Service

sio2 1 15 1:In Service

cp 1 16:In Service

ipb 1:In Service

TIER 1 Health Count Breakdown:

sio8 1 16 1: 0002 sio8 1 16 2: 0002 sutl 1 15: 0002 strn 1 15: 0002 xsmp 1 15 1: 0002 eth 1 16 0: 0002

Remote TIER 1 Health Total: 20

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 213 of 484

TIER 2 Health Count Breakdown:

=======================================

ELAN 16 IP : 47.11.138.150 Health = 2

ELAN 17 IP : 47.11.138.153 Health = 2

Remote AML over ELAN Total Health:4

Remote Total IPL health = 6

Remote TIER 2 Health Total:10

5

Get status of links to the Media Gateways (STAT IPL).

LD 135

STAT IPL

****

Get status of MG 1000E (Media Gateway)

Media Gateway 1: LINK UP

Media Gateway 2: LINK UP

Media Gateway 3: LINK UP

Media Gateway 4: LINK UP

Exit the program

The system now operates in full redundant mode with

Call Server 1 active.

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 214 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Complete the installation

Testing the Call Servers

Procedure 40

Testing Call Server 0

At this point in the installation, Call Server 0 is tested from active Call Server 1.

Upon successful completion of these tests, call processing is switched and the same tests are performed on Call Server 1 from active Call Server 0. As a final step, call processing is then switched again to Call Server 1.

From active Call Server 1, perform the following tests on Call Server 0:

1

Perform a redundancy sanity test:

LD 135

STAT CPU

TEST CPU

Get status of CPU and memory

Test the CPU

2

Check the LCD states

a.

Perform a visual check of the LCDs.

b.

Test and LCDs:

LD 135

TEST LED

DSPL ALL

Test LEDs

c.

Check that the LCD display matches the software check.

3

Test the System Utility card

LD 135

Load program

STAT SUTL

Get the status of the System Utility card

TEST SUTL

Test the System Utility card

Note:

SUTL commands only apply to Pentium II and Pentium IV based

CS 1000E systems.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 215 of 484

4

Test system redundancy and media devices:

LD 137

Load program

TEST RDUN

Test redundancy

DATA RDUN

Test database integrity

STAT FMD

Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices

(FMD)

STAT RMD

Status of one or both Removable Media Devices

(RMD)

5

Clear the display and minor alarms on both Call Servers:

LD 135

CDSP

CMAJ

CMIN ALL

Load program

Clear the displays on the cores

Clear major alarms

Clear minor alarms

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 216 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Switch call processing

Procedure 41

Switching call processing

LD 135

SCPU

Load program

Switch call processing from Call Server

1 to Call Server 0

Call Server 0 is now the active call processor.

End of Procedure

Procedure 42

Testing Call Server 1

From active Call Server 0, perform these tests on Call Server 1:

1

Perform a redundancy sanity test:

LD 135

STAT CPU

TEST CPU

Load program

Get status of CPU and memory

Test the CPU

2

Check the LCD states.

a.

Perform a visual check of the LCDs.

b.

Test LCDs:

LD 135

TEST LCDs

DSPL ALL

Load program

Test LCDs

c.

Check that the LCD display matches the software check.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 217 of 484

3

Test the System Utility card:

LD 135

Load program

STAT SUTL

Get the status of the System Utility card

TEST SUTL

Test the System Utility card

4

Test system redundancy and media devices:

LD 137

Load program

TEST RDUN

Test redundancy

DATA RDUN

Test database integrity

STAT FMD

Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices

(FMD)

STAT RMD

****

Status of one or both Removable Media Devices

(RMD)

Exit the program

5

Clear the display and minor alarms on both Call Servers:

LD 135

CDSP

CMAJ

CMIN ALL

Load program

Clear the displays on the CP PM Call Servers

Clear major alarms

Clear minor alarms

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 218 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Switch call processing

Procedure 43

Switching call processing

LD 135

SCPU

Load program

Switch call processing from Call Server

0 to Call Server 1

Call Server 1 is now the active call processor.

End of Procedure

Perform a customer backup data dump (installation release)

Procedure 44

Performing a data dump to backup the customer database:

1

Log in to the system.

2

Insert the 128 MByte CF card into the active Call Server RMD slot to back up the database.

3

Load the Equipment Data Dump Program (LD 43). At the prompt, enter:

.

LD 43

Load program.

EDD

4

When “EDD000” appears on the terminal, enter:

EDD

Begin the data dump.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 219 of 484

CAUTION — Service Interruption

Loss of Data

If the data dump is not successful, do not continue; contact your technical support organization. A data dump problem must be corrected before proceeding.

5

When “DATADUMP COMPLETE” and “DATABASE BACKUP

COMPLETE” appear on the terminal, enter:

****

Exit program

The installation is now complete.

End of Procedure

Configuring the Media Gateway zone and IP address

Note: Before you can configure zones, you must create a customer in

LD 15.

The next step in the process involves configuring the Media Gateway zone and IP address in Overlay 97 on the Call Server.

Note: This procedure may be performed through Element Manager following the installation of the Signaling Server. To configure a Media

Gateway using Element Manager see Procedure 59 on page 273 .

1

Log into Overlay 97 to configure the MGC that will register to the call server:

>LD 97

SCSYS000

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 220 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 103979814 USED U P: 230475 59531

TOT: 104269820

REQ prt

TYPE supl

SUPL

SUPL SUPT SLOT XPEC0 XPEC1 IPMG ZONE0/1 IPR0/1

REQ chg

TYPE supl

SUPL 0

SLOT

SUPT ipmg

IPR0 <IP address for shelf 0>

IPR1 <IP address for shelf 1>

IPMG_TYP0 mgc

ZONE0 1

**** ALL VWG CHANNELS MUST BE OUTED AND

RECONFIGURED AFTER IPMG ZONE CHANGE

DES0

-CE

Initial configuration of the Gateway Controller

Note: Coordinate all Nars/Bars and NRS changes to ensure that your cutover plan is designed for minimum downtime.

The Gateway Controller must be given a superloop and shelf reference on the

Call Server (see Table 24)

.

Table 24

Gateway Controller superloop configuration

Loop

000

000

Shelf

0

1

IPMG #

1

2

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 221 of 484

Table 24

Gateway Controller superloop configuration

Loop

004

004

008

...

096

096

Shelf

0

...

0

1

0

1

IPMG #

5

...

3

4

49

50

Perform the following procedure to initially configure the Gateway

Controller.

Procedure 45

Configuring the Gateway Controller on the Call Server

Note:

Initial configuration of the Gateway Controller is command line

ONLY.

The Gateway Controller is shipped with “gold” software in onboard flash memory. If centralized software upgrade is enabled on the Call Server, the

Gateway Controller is upgraded automatically (or it can be upgraded manually through LD 143).

There are two ways to enter mgcsetup:

• If no IP information exists on the Gateway Controller, it will boot directly into the setup menu.

• If IP information does exist, use <CTRL>L<CTRL>D<CTRL>B

(provide LDB username and password to access LDB). Then Invoke the mgcsetup

command.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 222 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

The MGC Shells can be accessed using the following commands:

•

<CTRL> OAM,

(provide OAM username and password to access

OAM shell)

•

<CTRL> LDB,

(provide LDB username and password to access

LDB)

1

Enter network IP information at the mgcsetup menu.

Note:

TLAN IP information must be entered with Element Manager. If mgcsetup prompts for TLAN information, the Gateway Controller loadware is older than version MGCBAD.

Please define the data networking parameters for this

MG 1000E now.

Hostname: MGC_N313 (optional)

ELAN IP: 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.33

ELAN subnet mask: 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

ELAN gateway IP: 192.168.3.1

Primary CS IP: 192.168.3.32

Enter port and security parameters, if required:

ELAN security = “ISec,” based on IPSec standard. Must be configured on every component expected to communicate across the ELAN, or not configured at all. There are 4 options:

• None - no security used

• Opti - optimal: XMsg + PbxLink ports.

• Func - functional: all ELAN communication between node components is secured, but external communication (eg: Call Pilot, maintenance PC) is not.

• Full - all communication uses ISec. Exceptions are SSL & SSH

(already encrypted), NTP (has its own authentication method) and

AML (legacy support requires unsecured link).

Change MGC advanced parameters? (y/[n]) : y

TLAN is set to auto negotiate, change? (y/[n]) : y

Note: Turning off auto negotiate on the TLAN

: will default it to 100Mbps full duplex.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 223 of 484

Set TLAN to auto negotiate? ([y]/n) : y

ELAN is set to auto negotiate, change? (y/[n]) : y

Note: Turning off auto negotiate on the ELAN

: will default it to 100Mbps full duplex.

Set ELAN to auto negotiate? ([y]/n) : y

ELAN security Disabled, change? (y/[n]) : y

Enable ELAN security ? (y/[n]) : y

Enter security level OPTI, FUNC or FULL : opti

Note: Spaces ~ * ` @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.

Please input PSK(16-32 chars): (input is not echoed)

Strength of PSK: Weak

Please reenter PSK(16-32 chars): (input is not echoed)

Set MGC to TDM only? (y/[n]) : n

Note: Turning on TDM only will not allow

: the MGC to be connected to a network.

2

Review the network information and enter “y” to confirm.

You have entered the following parameters for this MG

1000E:

Hostname : MGC_N313

ELAN IP : 192.168.3.33

ELAN subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

ELAN gateway IP : 192.168.3.1

TLAN IP : 192.168.19.33

TLAN subnet mask : 255.255.255.0

TLAN gateway IP : 192.168.19.1

Primary CS Hostname : CS1000E_N313

Primary CS IP : 192.168.3.32

Alternate CS 1 Hostname :

Alternate CS 1 IP : 0.0.0.0

Alternate CS 2 Hostname :

Alternate CS 2 IP : 0.0.0.0

TLAN set to auto negotiate.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 224 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

ELAN set to auto negotiate.

ELAN security Enabled, level is Optimized Security

Is this correct? (y/n/[a]bort) : y

3

IP changes require a reboot. Enter “y” at the prompt

.

Do you want to continue? (y/n/[a]bort) : y reboot(-1) has been called...

Following the reboot, the Gateway Controller connects to the Call Server and downloads the remaining configuration information.

If centralized software upgrade has been enabled, the Gateway Controller will upgrade its loadware by downloading it from the Call Server.

After the software has been upgraded, another reboot will be triggered.

After reboot, the Gateway Controller registers to the Call Server and the LED displays the superloop and shelf (for example: 4 0) of the Media Gateway. If registration fails, it shows “UNRG.”

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Page 225 of 484

Rebooting the MGC

The MGC reboots and registers with the Call Server.

Found device : INTEL 82365SL

Engcode:NTDW60BA REL 08

ELAN mac address is:00:13:65:ff:ee:ed

TLAN mac address is:00:13:65:ff:ee:ec

RESET reason: Hard Reset.

Daughter board 1:NTDW62AA R02 00:13:65:ff:f8:fd.

Daughter board 2:NOT INS

VxWorks System Boot

Copyright 1984-2005 Wind River Systems, Inc.

CPU: Chagall

Version: VxWorks5.5.1

Bootcode version: MGCBAA20 auto-booting...

Loading MSP from CF...1375736

Booting ARM0 (MSP) at 0x00000100 ...

Loading CSP from CF...6643712 + 5849088

Booting ARM1 (CSP) at 0x80010000 ...

Found device : INTEL 82365SL

Loading symbol table from /p/mainos.sym ...done

Loadware upgrade

If the Gateway Controller loadware is out of date (compared to the loadware on the Call Server), an upgrade of the loadware occurs based on the

Centralized Upgrade setting defined during the software install and the values set in overlay 143. The default values are set so that the upgrade starts automatically once registration is achieved with the Call Server.

There are seven pieces of loadware that are updated on the Gateway

Controller. These updates are downloaded from the Call Server.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 226 of 484

Installing software on the CS 1000E

Note: Not all of the loads are upgraded during each software install. The system upgrades loads which are out of date. DBL1 and DBL2 loads are only used if you have the appropriate daughter boards installed on the

MGC card.

-> Received an upgrade request. Preparing MGC for upgrade.

Auto commit option has been enabled.

Upgrade of CSP loadware initiated.

OMM: IP link is UP between Primary Call Server and MGC 1

Upgrade of MSP loadware initiated.

Upgrade of APP loadware initiated.

Upgrade of FPGA loadware initiated.

Upgrade of DBL1 initiated.

Upgrade of DBL2 initiated.

-> 0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst):

Upgrading FPGA Loadware...

logTask: 1 log messages lost.

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Programming FPGA ...

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): FPGA Upgrade completed.

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Upgrading Application Loadware ...

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Gold CSP image upgraded

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): mgcBootLineFix:fixing the bootline

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Upgrade Application Loadware completed

0x86f8bc30 (tMGCInst): Rebooting MGC to take the upgrade in effect.

IMPORTANT!

At this point the IPMGs synchronize with the Call Server.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

232

Page 227 of 484

Installing a Signaling Server

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Signaling Server task flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Supported hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IP subnet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

ISP1100 migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Installing Signaling Server hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Installing Signaling Server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 228 of 484

Installing a Signaling Server

Signaling Server task flow

Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-315) provides installation, upgrade, and configuration information for Signaling Servers. You must follow the proper sequence of events to correctly install or upgrade the Linux base and applications. Use the task flow information in this chapter to determine the proper steps for the installation or upgrade of the Linux base and applications. The task flow refers to the NTP number that contains the detailed procedures required for the task.

For more information refer to the following NTPs, which are referenced in

Figure 87 on page 229

:

• Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-315)

• Element Manager: System Administration (NN43001-632)

• Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 87

Signaling Server taskflow

Installing a Signaling Server

Page 229 of 484

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 230 of 484

Installing a Signaling Server

Supported hardware

CS 1000 Release 7.0 supports the following hardware platforms as stand-alone Signaling Servers:

• Server cards

— Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP PM) card

— Common Processor Dual Core (CP DC) card

• Commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) servers

For more information about the supported roles for hardware platforms, see

Table 1: “Hardware platform supported roles” on page 34 .

IP subnet configuration

CS 1000 Release 7.0 Signaling Servers support IPv6 and IPv4 addresses. If the Signaling Server and Call Server reside in different IP subnets, you must manually add a route from Base Manager in order for Element Manager to communicate and interact with the Call Server. For more information, see

Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-315).

ISP1100 migration

CS 1000 Release 7.0 does not support the ISP1100 Signaling Server. To migrate an ISP1100 Signaling Server to a CS 1000 Release 7.0 hardware platform, see Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals

(NN43001-125).

Installing Signaling Server hardware

For Signaling Server hardware installation information, see Linux Platform

Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-315).

For information about the hardware platforms, see Circuit Card Reference

(NN43001-311).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing a Signaling Server

Page 231 of 484

Installing Signaling Server software

Signaling Server software requires the Linux base operating system. For information on performing Linux software installations, see Linux Platform

Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning (NN43001-315) and

Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 232 of 484

Installing a Signaling Server

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

252

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 233 of 484

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configuring MS Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Logging in to Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files . . . . 244

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . 248

Performing a datadump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Introduction

An IP Telephony node is defined as a collection of Signaling Servers and

Voice Gateway Media Cards. Each network node has a unique Node ID, which is an integer value. A node has only one Leader Signaling Server. All other Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards are defined as

Followers. An IP Telephony node must be configured to make a CS 1000 system operational. For more information about IP Telephony nodes and their configuration, refer to IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500).

The IP Telephony node database files are backed up, along with the customer database, by using the EDD command in LD 43. Refer to Software Input/

Output: Administration (NN43001-611) for details about this command.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 234 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

The preconfigured IP telephony configuration files from the leader Signaling

Server must be imported. These files are saved on the CS 1000E as:

• c:/u/db/node/nodex.cfg where x is the node number

• c:/u/db/node/nodex.btp where x is the node number

IMPORTANT!

Do not attempt to alter the configuration files either manually or with IP

Phone management. Use Element Manager only.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 46: "Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer" on page 235

•

Procedure 47: "Launching Element Manager" on page 238

•

Procedure 48: "Importing an existing node" on page 242

•

Procedure 49: "Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration" on page 244

•

Procedure 50: "Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in Element Manager" on page 248

•

Procedure 51: "Performing a datadump using Element Manager" on page 249

Before you begin

Perform a datadump

Use Element Manager to perform a datadump before making any changes to the IP telephony node. A datadump backs up both the IP telephony node configuration files and the customer database files. The datadump procedure

using Element Manager is outlined in Procedure 51 on page 249

.

Enable the multi-user option

Enable the multi-user option to access Command Line Interface (CLI) overlays and Element Manager at the same time. For more information about

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 235 of 484

Limited Access to Overlays, see Features and Services (NN43001-106) and

Software Input/Output: Administration (NN43001-611).

Configuring MS Internet Explorer

Element Manager is available to configure IP telephony parameters on the system. It is accessed by pointing MS Internet Explorer (version 6.0.2600 or higher) to the ELAN subnet, TLAN subnet, or node IP address of the

Signaling Server.

Note: Element Manager requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0.2600 or higher. The Netscape browser is not supported.

IMPORTANT!

Internet Explorer caching must be turned off. If Internet Explorer caching is on, the user cannot see the changes in real-time.

Follow Procedure 46 to prevent caching of web pages by Internet Explorer.

Procedure 46

Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer

1

Launch Internet Explorer.

2

Click Tools > Internet Options. The Internet Options window opens

(see Figure 88 on page 236

).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 236 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Figure 88

Internet Explorer – Internet Options

3

On the General tab, under the Temporary Internet files section, click

Settings. The Settings window opens (see Figure 89 on page 237 ).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 237 of 484

Figure 89

Temporary Internet files – Settings window

4

Click Every visit to the page. This checks for new versions of stored pages on every visit to the web page.

5

Click OK in the Settings window.

6

Click OK in the Internet Options window.

End of Procedure

Logging in to Element Manager

Element Manager (EM) for CS 1000 is a component of the Nortel Unified

Communications Management Common Services (UCM Common Services).

The UCM Common Services provides security and navigation infrastructure services for the web-based management applications: Element Manager

(EM), NRS Manager and Subscriber Manager. Refer to Unified

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 238 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Communications Management Common Services Fundamentals

(NN43001-116) for detailed information on UCM Common Services.

To log in to Element Manager, follow the steps in Procedure 47 on page 238 .

Element Manager supports Microsoft

TM

Internet Explorer 6.0.2600 for

Windows operating systems.

Before following this procedure, see Signaling Server IP Line Application

Fundamentals (NN43001-125) for information about setting up a browser for optimal performance of Element Manager.

Note: This procedure requires Service Pack 1 and Java Runtime environment.

Procedure 47

Launching Element Manager

1

Open the web browser.

2

In the browser’s address field, enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name

(FQDN) or IP address of a UCM Common Services server that is a member of the Security Domain that the EM server is a member of.

Note:

The FQDN of the ECM server can be bookmarked in the Internet

Explorer Favorites list.

3

The Security Alert Web page opens, as shown in (see Figure 90).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 90

Security Alert Web page

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 239 of 484

4

Click the Yes button. The UCM log in Web page opens, as shown in

Figure 91.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 240 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Figure 91

UCM log in

5

Enter User Name and Password in the text boxes. Click the Log in button.

The UCM Elements Web page opens, as shown in Figure 92 on page 240 .

Figure 92

UCM elements web page

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 241 of 484

6

Click the link to the Element Manager in the Element Name column. The

Element Manager System Overview Web page opens, as shown in

Figure 93 on page 241

.

Figure 93

Element Manager System Overview Web page

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 242 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files

Follow Procedure 48 to import the preconfigured IP telephony files from the

Signaling Server.

Procedure 48

Importing an existing node

Figure 94 displays the Element Manager System Information home page.

Figure 94

Element Manager – System Information

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 243 of 484

1

Select Nodes: Servers, Media Cards from the navigator.

The IP Telephony Nodes web page appears. No nodes are defined.

2

Import the Node files from the leader Signaling Server.

a.

Click the Import button on the IP Telephony Nodes web page.

The Import IP Telephony Nodes screen in Figure 95 on page 243

appears.

b.

Select the Existing Server radio button and enter the ELAN IP address of the leader Signaling Server in the input box.

Figure 95

Import IP Telephony Nodes – Retrieve and upgrade configuration files

3

Click Preview.

4

Click Import.

A success message appears.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 244 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

5

Click OK to go to the next procedure.

End of Procedure

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files

Follow Procedure 49 to review and submit IP telephony node configuration

files.

Procedure 49

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration

1

From the Node Summary web page (see Figure 127 on page 340 ), click

Edit to view the node parameters.

The Edit web page appears as shown in Figure 128 on page 341

.

Note 1:

Clicking Transfer / Status displays the Transfer / Status web

page (see Figure 99 on page 247 ). This sends the node configuration

files to all IP Telephony components in the node.

• If any element within the node fails to transfer either BOOTP or

CONFIG files, Transfer / Status is highlighted in red.

• Transfer / Status is highlighted in yellow if the transfer status of the node elements is unavailable.

Note 2:

Delete is used to delete the corresponding node. The node is not automatically deleted. A message displays and asks if you are sure you want to delete the node.

2

Review the node parameters by opening each tab.

Note:

For detailed information on each of the node parameters, refer to

IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation (NN43100-500).

3

Click Save and Transfer.

4

Click OK to save the node configuration to the CS 1000E and transfer the configuration to all elements.

After a few seconds, the Transfer Progress web page opens and

displays each of the elements in the node (see Figure 96 on page 245 ).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 245 of 484

The Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the CONFIG.INI and

BOOTP.TAB files from the CS 1000E. A check mark is added to each field as the card receives its CONFIG.INI and BOOTP.TAB files.

The status column provides the progress of the transfer:

• The Status column displays “Starting” as the transfer begins (see

Figure 96 on page 245

).

• The Status column displays “Transfer” as the node configuration is

transferred to the elements (see Figure 97 on page 245 ).

• The Status column displays “Complete” if the transfer is successful

for an element (see Figure 98 on page 246

).

• The Status column displays “Fail” if the transfer is unsuccessful.

Figure 96

Transfer Progress – Starting

Figure 97

Transfer Progress – Transferring

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 246 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

When the file transfer is complete, the Transfer Progress web page

displays a status of complete (see Figure 98 on page 246 ).

Figure 98

Transfer Progress – Complete

5

Click OK in the dialog box.

The Transfer / Status web page displays.

Note:

The Transfer / Status web page (see Figure 99) can also be

displayed from the Node Summary web page by clicking Transfer /

Status. This web page indicates if the transfer was successful or not. For

example, Figure 99 shows some elements as unreachable; you can

transfer to these elements again.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 247 of 484

Figure 99

Transfer / Status web page

The previous status of the node displays, and the failure reason is displayed for elements in nodes that failed to get configuration files

(BOOTP.TAB and CONFIG.INI) from the CS 1000E.

The Transfer / Status web page has five buttons:

• Selected All. Selects all the elements in the node (that is, it adds a check mark in each element’s check box).

• Unselect All. Unselects all the elements in the node (that is, it removes the check marks for all the selected elements).

• Transfer to Selected Elements. Re-transfers node configuration files only to selected elements, regardless of a “Transfer Failed” state.

• Transfer to Failed Elements. Transfers only node configuration files to elements in a “Transfer Failed” state. The Transfer to Failed

Elements button is displayed only when at least one element on the

Node failed to transfer either a BOOTP.TAB or CONFIG.INI in the previous operation.

• Cancel. Closes the Transfer / Status pages without performing any action, and displays the Node Summary web page.

6

If the Signaling Server configuration was changed on the Edit web page, reboot the Signaling Server.

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 248 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an

IP telephony node

Follow Procedure 50 to add a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony

node in Element Manager.

Procedure 50

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in

Element Manager

Note:

After software installation and reboot, the Follower Signaling

Server sends out BootP requests and waits for a response. Because the

Follower Signaling Server has not booted successfully before, it waits for a non-existing BootP response. Do not wait for this response; proceed to the next steps.

In Element Manager:

1

Click Edit on the Node Configuration web page.

2

Click Add beside the Signaling Server row.

3

Enter the Follower Signaling Server data to an IP telephony node. Include the ELAN MAC address (used to answer BootP requests).

4

Click Save and Transfer to save the changes and the Leader Signaling

Server then obtains a copy of the node files.

5

Click OK to save the node configuration to the CS 1000E and transfer the configuration to all elements.

When the file transfer is complete, the Transfer/ Status web page appears.

The Leader Signaling Server responds to the Follower Signaling Server's

BootP request.

The Follower Signaling Server initializes its network interfaces.

The Follower Signaling Server attempts to FTP the BOOTP.TAB file from the node master (Leader Signaling Server).

Note:

Since the Follower cannot obtain the system login and password, the FTP fails (for first-time Follower Signaling Server installation only). It does not have the current CONFIG.INI file that contains the CS 1000E IP address. Subsequent FTPs succeed.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 249 of 484

6

Transfer the node files again, so that the Follower Signaling Server obtains a copy of CONFIG.INI.

7

Reboot the Follower Signaling Server so that all its applications can start based on the new CONFIG.INI file.

The Signaling Server uses BootP to obtain its network data, and it then

FTPs the BOOTP.TAB file from the node master (Leader Signaling

Server).

End of Procedure

Performing a datadump

Follow Procedure 51 to perform a datadump using Element Manager. This

procedure is an alternative to using CLI to perform a datadump. The datadump backs up new IP Telephony node files on the CS 1000E at the same time that it backs up the customer database.

Procedure 51

Performing a datadump using Element Manager

From Element Manager (see Figure 91 on page 240

for details on logging in), do the following:

1

Choose Tools> Backup and Restore > Call Server from the navigator.

The Call Server Backup and Restore web page opens (see Figure 100 on page 250

).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 250 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

Figure 100

Call Server Backup and Restore web page

Figure 101

CS 1000E Backup

2

Select Backup.

The Call Server Backup web page appears (see Figure 101 on page 250 ).

3

Select Backup from the Action drop-down list box.

4

Click Submit.

The message displays indicating “Backup in progress. Please wait...”

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring an IP telephony node

Page 251 of 484

5

Click OK in the EDD complete dialog box.

The Backup function then displays information in a tabular form, indicating the actions that were performed.

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 252 of 484

Configuring an IP telephony node

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

272

Page 253 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E

Call Server

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configuring login IDs and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Enabling the multi-user option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Checking PTY status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Bandwidth Management Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Logging in to Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files . . . . 268

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . 269

Performing a datadump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Port blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Introduction

The CS 1000E system requires the configuration of an IP telephony node.

The configuration data is stored in the BOOTP.TAB and CONFIG.INI files

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 254 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server on the CS 1000E. Copies of both files are maintained on each node component (Signaling Server and Voice Gateway Media Card).

The preconfigured IP telephony configuration files from the leader Signaling

Server must be imported. These files are saved on the CS 1000E as:

• c:/u/db/node/nodex.cfg where x is the node number

• c:/u/db/node/nodex.btp where x is the node number

IMPORTANT!

Do not attempt to alter the configuration files either manually or with IP

Phone management. Use Element Manager only.

The node database files are backed up along with the customer database using the LD 43 EDD command.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 52: "Configuring login IDs and passwords" on page 255

•

Procedure 53: "Enabling the multi-user option" on page 258

•

Procedure 54: "Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs)" on page 259

•

Procedure 55: "Checking PTY status" on page 261

•

Procedure 56: "Launching Element Manager" on page 264

•

Procedure 57: "Importing an existing node" on page 267

•

Procedure 58: "Performing a datadump using Element Manager" on page 269

Configuring login IDs and passwords

Note: Any username and password created on the Call Server will no longer be accessible after joining the UCM security domain. To avoid confusion, consider using the same username and password for both. For

UCM password conventions and restrictions, see Unified

Communications Management Common Services Fundamentals

(NN43001-116).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 255 of 484

You must be logged in as a user with admin2 level priveleges in order to change the default username and password.

For increased security:

• Change the default login username and password.

The default login is username admin1 and password 0000, as used throughout this guide.

• Configure the Limited Access Password (LAPW) IDs and passwords.

Follow Procedure 52 to configure login IDs and passwords.

Procedure 52

Configuring login IDs and passwords

1

Enter the command:

LD 17

CFN000

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 1015918 USED U P: 138773 24956

TOT:1179647

DISK RECS AVAIL: 486

TMDI D-CHANNELS AVAIL: 0 USED: 0 TOT: 0

DCH AVAIL: 80 USED: 0 TOT: 80

AML AVAIL: 15 USED: 1 TOT: 16

2

Enter the command:

REQ CHG

3

Enter the command:

PSWD_COMP

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

FPC

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

LOUT

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

FLTH

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

LOCK

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 256 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

FLTA

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

AUDT

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

LLID

<enter to accept default or set to required setting>

4

Enter the command:

ACCOUNT_REQ new

5

Enter the command:

PWD_TYPE pwd2 (pwd1, pwd2, lapw are options)

6

Enter the command:

USER_NAME kattest (username)

7

Enter the command:

PASSWORD (userpassword)

8

Enter the command:

CONFIRM (confirm password)

9

Enter the command:

ACCT yes (yes for pdt access, default for no pdt access

10 Enter the command:

PDT pdt2 (pdt1 or pdt2)

11 Enter the command:

ACCOUNT_REQ new

12 Enter the command:

PWD_TYPE lapw

13 Enter the command:

PWTP ovly

14 Enter the command:

USER_NAME kattest (username)

15 Enter the command:

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 257 of 484

PASSWORD (userpassword)

16 Enter the command:

CONFIRM (confirm password)

17 Enter the command:

OVLA 10 11

18 Enter the command:

OVLA all

19 Enter the command:

OVLA

20 Enter the command:

Cust 0

21 Enter the command:

TEN

22 Enter the command:

CUST

23 Enter the command:

HOST

24 Enter the command:

MAT

25 Enter the command:

OPT

26 Enter the command:

PDT

PWD ACCOUNT SETTINGS SAVED

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 258 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Enabling the multi-user option

Follow Procedure 53 to enable the multi-user option.

Procedure 53

Enabling the multi-user option

1

Enter the command:

LD 17

System response:

CFN000

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 1015918 USED U P: 138773 24956

TOT: 1179647

DISK RECS AVAIL: 486

TMDI D-CHANNELS AVAIL: 0 USED: 0 TOT: 0

DCH AVAIL: 80 USED: 0 TOT: 80

AML AVAIL: 15 USED: 1 TOT: 16

2

Enter the command:

REQ chg

3

Enter the command:

TYPE ovly

....

4

Enter the command:

MULTI_USER on

System response:

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 1015893 USED U P: 138773 24981

TOT: 1179647

DISK RECS AVAIL: 486

TMDI D-CHANNELS AVAIL: 0 USED: 0 TOT: 0

DCH AVAIL: 80 USED: 0 TOT: 80

AML AVAIL: 15 USED: 1 TOT: 16

5

Enter the command:

REQ ****

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 259 of 484

Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs)

CS 1000E provides two ports (COM1 and COM2) on the CPU. A Terminal

Server is used to provide additional serial ports for specific applications, such as CTY, MCT, PMS, and TRF. Each configured Terminal Server serial port automatically starts an rlogin session with a user ID to a dedicated pseudo

(PTY) port in the CS 1000E system. Nortel recommends configuring at least two PTYs for general use (rlogin sessions with no user ID). In practice, a maximum of 14 PTYs can be used, leaving 2 TTYs for COM1 and COM2 on the CPU card. Login to PTY is case sensitive.

Every PTY configured is given a user ID "PTYx", where x is the port number assigned to the PORT prompt. If no input is entered for the PORT prompt, the default value is the same as the TTY number. Nortel recommends using the default value for easy management. When an rlogin session is initiated with a user ID, the Call Server searches for a free PTY with a matching user ID.

The search starts with the highest configured PTY number and progresses in descending order of the PTY number. If no free PTY with a matching user ID is found, the connection is refused. In this case, TTY012 message is printed on the administration terminal. When an rlogin session is initiated with no user ID specified, the Call Server searches for a free PTY. The search starts from the lowest configured PTY number and progresses in ascending order of the PTY number. The first available PTY is used to open the rlogin session.

In order to minimize the probability of having a PTY configured for a specific application being used for general rlogin sessions, PTYs of specific applications are configured to start with the highest TTY number, such as 15, and progress in descending order. PTYs for general use are configured to start with the lowest number and progress in ascending order.

Follow Procedure 54 to configure pseudo-terminals.

Procedure 54

Configuring pseudo-terminals (PTYs)

Nortel recommends that at least two PTYs be configured. A maximum of four

PTYs can be allocated on a CS 1000E system.

1

Enter the command:

LD 17

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 260 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

System response:

CFN000

MEM AVAIL:(U/P):1019254 USED U P:138012 22381

TOT:1179647

DISK RECS AVAIL: 491

TMDI D-CHANNELS AVAIL: 0 USED: 0 TOT: 0

DCH AVAIL: 80 USED: 0 TOT: 80

AML AVAIL: 15 USED: 1 TOT: 16

2

Enter the command:

REQ CHG

3

Enter the command:

TYPE CFN

4

Enter the command:

ADAN NEW TTY <x>

Where:

<x> =

an available TTY number (0-15)

5

Enter the command:

CTYP PTY

6

Enter the command:

PORT <y>

Where:

<y> = an available PTY port (0-7)

7

Enter the command:

DES <z>

Where:

<z> = designator (for example, “““ether 1”)

8

Enter the command:

FLOW NO

9

Enter the command:

USER MTC BUG SCH

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 261 of 484

10 Enter the command:

TTYLOG NO

11 Enter the command:

BANR YES

System response:

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):1019130 USED U P: 138064 22453

TOT: 3555327

DISK RECS AVAIL: 491

TMDI D-CHANNELS AVAIL: 0 USED: 0 TOT: 0

DCH AVAIL: 80 USED: 0 TOT: 80

AML AVAIL: 15 USED: 1 TOT: 16

ADAN DATA SAVED

12 Enter the command:

ADAN ****

End of Procedure

Checking PTY status

Follow Procedure 55 to check the PTY status.

Procedure 55

Checking PTY status

Pseudo-terminals show enabled only if you are using them.

1

Enter the command:

LD 37

2

Enter the command:

STAT

System response:

TTY 0: ENBL DES: ...

TTY 1: ENBL DES: ...

TTY 2: ENBL DES: ...

TTY 3: ENBL DES: ...

TTY 12: DSBL DES: ether 1

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 262 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

TTY 13: DSBL DES: ether 2

TTY 14: DSBL DES: ether 3

3

Enter the command:

****

4

Perform an EDD to save your changes.

End of Procedure

Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits

Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits must be defined for use by each

MG 1000E. Use LD 17 to add MGTDS and MG Conference loops. The configuration of TDS loops and conference loops are separated. The loop number for TDS and conference can be any number from 0-255.

LD 17 – Add Virtual Tone and Conference loops.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

...

MGTDS

Response

CHG

CEQU

...

X

Comment

Change existing data

Common Equipment

(x=superloop number)

IPMG a b

MGCONF X

IPMG a b

(a=loop of MG, b=shelf of MG)

(x=superloop number)

(a=loop of MG, b=shelf of MG)

Bandwidth Management Zones

For more information about configuring Bandwidth Management zones, see

Converging the Data Network with VoIP (NN43001-260).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 263 of 484

The type of any Bandwidth Management Zone for MG 1000E with conference resources configured must be shared.

Distortion in Music is expected when G.729AB codec is used. Hence the

Interzone and the Intrazone policies for an MG 1000E Bandwidth

Management Zone should have Best Quality to give preference to G711 codec to minimize of occurrence of music distortion.

IMPORTANT!

Currently, the CS 1000E only supports Recorded Announcement

Broadcast and Music Broadcast.

Ensure that the bandwidth provisioned is adequate to provide the acceptable blocking level of the resources in the MG 1000E. Refer to the

Communication Server 1000E: Planning and Engineering (NN43041-220) for details.

Logging in to Element Manager

Element Manager (EM) is a component of the Nortel Unified

Communications Management Common Services (UCM Common Services).

The UCM Common Services provides security and navigation infrastructure services for the web-based management applications: Element Manager

(EM), NRS Manager and Subscriber Manager. Refer to Unified

Communications Management Common Services Fundamentals

(NN43001-116) for detailed information on UCM Common Services.

To log in to Element Manager, follow the steps in Procedure 56 on page 264 .

Element Manager supports Microsoft

TM

Internet Explorer 6.0.2600 for

Windows operating systems.

Before following this procedure, see Signaling Server IP Line Application

Fundamentals (NN43001-125) for information about setting up a browser for optimal performance of Element Manager.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 264 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Note: This procedure requires Service Pack 1 and Java Runtime environment.

Procedure 56

Launching Element Manager

1

Open the web browser.

2

In the browser’s address field, enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name

(FQDN) or IP address of a UCM Common Services server that is a member of the Security Domain that the EM server is a member of.

Note:

The FQDN of the ECM server can be bookmarked in the Internet

Explorer Favorites list.

3

The Security Alert Web page opens, as shown in (see Figure 102).

Figure 102

Security Alert Web page

4

Click the Yes button. The UCM log in Web page opens, as shown in

Figure 103.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 103

UCM log in

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 265 of 484

5

Enter User Name and Password in the text boxes. Click the Log in button.

The UCM Elements Web page opens, as shown in Figure 104 on page 265 .

Figure 104

UCM elements web page

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 266 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

6

Click the link to the Element Manager in the Element Name column. The

Element Manager System Overview Web page opens, as shown in

Figure 105 on page 266 .

Figure 105

Element Manager System Overview Web page

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

End of Procedure

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 267 of 484

Importing preconfigured IP telephony files

Follow Procedure 57 to import the preconfigured IP telephony files from the

Signaling Server.

Procedure 57

Importing an existing node

1

Select Nodes: Servers, Media Cards from the navigator.

The IP Telephony Nodes web page appears. No nodes are defined.

2

Import the Node files from the leader Signaling Server.

a.

Click the Import button on the IP Telephony Nodes web page.

The Import IP Telephony Nodes screen in Figure 106 on page 268

appears.

b.

Select the Existing Server radio button and enter the ELAN IP address of the leader Signaling Server in the input box.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 268 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Figure 106

Import IP Telephony Nodes – Retrieve and upgrade configuration files

3

Click Preview.

4

Click Import.

A success message appears.

5

Click OK to go to the next procedure.

End of Procedure

Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files

To review and submit IP telephony node configuration files, please refer to

IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation (NN43100-500).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 269 of 484

Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an

IP telephony node

To add a follower signaling server to an IP telephony node, follow the procedure as given in Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals

(NN43001-312).

Performing a datadump

Follow Procedure 58 to perform a datadump using Element Manager. This

procedure is an alternative to using the CLI to perform a datadump. The datadump backs up new IP Telephony node files on the CS 1000E at the same time that it backs up the customer database.

Procedure 58

Performing a datadump using Element Manager

From Element Manager (see Figure 103 on page 265

for details on logging in), do the following:

1

Choose Tools> Backup and Restore > Call Server from the navigator.

The Call Server Backup and Restore web page opens (see Figure 107 on page 270

).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 270 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Figure 107

Call Server Backup and Restore web page

2

Select Backup.

The Call Server Backup web page appears (see Figure 108 on page 271 ).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 108

CS 1000E Backup

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

Page 271 of 484

3

Select Backup from the Action drop-down list box.

4

Click Submit.

The message displays indicating “Backup in progress. Please wait...”

5

Click OK in the EDD complete dialog box.

The Backup function then displays information in a tabular form, indicating the actions that were performed.

End of Procedure

Port blocking

You can use port blocking to prevent port-based attacks on system components by configuring port blocking rules. These rules are installed during initial CS 1000 software installation and require no specialized installation procedure. The rules are preconfigured with factory default settings.

A port blocking state indicating file indicates whether the feature is currently active or not. The rules are automatically propagated from the Call Server to dependent VGMC platforms.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 272 of 484

Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server

You can configure the port blocking rules using LD 117 or Element Manager, but there are a few mandatory rules that cannot be modified or deactivated.

The mandatory rules are considered system essential and remain in an activated state regardless of whether the port access is configured with default or customized settings.

The port access rules can only be activated on servers with VxWorks platforms (MGC, MC32S, CP PIV and CP PM). The Co-resident Call Server and Signaling Server (Co-res CS and SS) uses a Linux-based platform with a shell application called VxWorks (VXELL) Call Server. As a result, you cannot enable the port access restrictions rules directly for a Co-res CS and

SS, but you can administer the port access for other VxWorks components.

The Call Server component of this feature is directly related to the Call Server software release. If an upgrade is performed and the software is later backed out or downgraded, reinstalling a previous release will overwrite the access restrictions default and state files.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

286

Page 273 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Configuring the Media Gateway in Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Configuring conference TDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Configuring DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway channels . . . . . . . . . 284

Configuring the Media Gateway in Element Manager

Procedure 59 on page 273

describes how to configure the Media Gateway in

Element Manager

.

Perform the following procedure to configure a Media Gateway in Element

Manager.

Procedure 59

Configuring the Media Gateway (Element Manager)

1

In Element Manager, select IP Network > Media Gateways. Select the

appropriate Superloop Number and Shelf. See Figure 109 on page 274 .

2

Click Add.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 274 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Figure 109

Add IPMG

Enter the IP address, zone number, and the IPMG type. The remaining fields are automatically filled in.

You can use a Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card, a Common

Processor Media Gateway (CP MG) card, or a Media Gateway Extended

Peripheral Equipment Controller (MG XPEC) card as the Gateway

Controller in a Media Gateway.

MGC is the default IPMG type. If you use an MG XPEC as the Gateway

Controller, select IPMG type MGX. If you use a CP MG card as the

Gateway Controller, select IPMG type MGS. See Figure 110 on page 275 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 110

Select IPMG type in Element Manager

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 275 of 484

3

Click Save.

Note:

The IP address entered here is the same IP address as the one configured on the Media Gateway in an earlier procedure.

4

Enter the Gateway IP addresses and Voice LAN IP addresses (IPv4 and

IPv6). If the MGC has DSP daughterboards connected, select the type

and enter the IP addresses. See Figure 111 on page 276 .

If configuring an MGX type Media Gateway, see Figure 112 on page 277 .

Note:

IPMG type MGX only allows for the configuration of the DB96 daughterboard.

If configuring an MGS type Media Gateway, select DB32 or DB128 as the type of DSP daughterboard.

Note:

The CP MG card is available with 32 or 128 DSP ports. IPMG type

MGS only allows for the configuration of the DB32 or DB128 daughterboard

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 276 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Figure 111

Media Gateway MGC type configuration

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 112

Media Gateway MGX type configuration

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 277 of 484

5

Once configuration of the Media Gateway is complete, the Media

Gateways screen appears (Figure 113 on page 278

), listing the superloop and shelf numbers, IP address (IPv4 or IPv6), zone, and type of the recently configured Media Gateway. Click the radio-button next to the superloop. From the drop-down list select Add VGW channels.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 278 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Figure 113

Media Gateways

Figure 114

Add VGW channels

6

The Add VGW channels screen appears (Figure 114 on page 278

).

Select the number of required channels, the Terminal Number (the superloop and shelf numbers of the Media Gateway, the card number, and the unit). Provide a name and the daughterboard and customer type.

7

Click Save.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 115

VGW Channels - IPMG

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 279 of 484

Figure 115 on page 279

appears.The Media Gateway has been added to the list.

End of Procedure

Configuring conference TDS

Procedure 60 on page 280

describes how to configure conference TDS for a

Media Gateway using the CLI. To configure conference TDS for the Media

Gateway using Element Manager see Procedure 61 on page 281 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 280 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Procedure 60

Configure conference TDS (CLI)

1

Enter LD 17.

>LD 17

CFN000

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 99278047 USED U P: 4965412 26361

TOT: 104269820

DISK SPACE NEEDED: 20 KBYTES

DCH AVAIL: 255 USED: 0 TOT: 255

AML AVAIL: 16 USED: 0 TOT: 16

REQ chg

TYPE cequ

MPED

TERM

REMO

TERD

REMD

TERQ

REMQ

DDCS

DTCS

XCT

MGTDS 126

IPMG x x

MGTDS

MGCONF 127

IPMG 0 0

MGCONF

MFSD

DTDT

DLOP

PRI2

APVL

DTI2

EXT0

EXT1

SYNM

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 99277361 USED U P: 4966043 26416

TOT: 104269820

DISK SPACE NEEDED: 20 KBYTES

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 281 of 484

Procedure 61 describes how to configure conference TDS for a Media

Gateway using Element Manager.

Procedure 61

Configuring conference TDS (Element Manager)

1

In the Element Manager screen, select IP Network > Media Gateways.

The Media Gateway Configuration page appears.

2

Select the IPMG superloop (see Figure 116). Click the Digital Trunking

button.

Figure 116

Media Gateway configuration

The loop configuration page appears.

3

From the drop down menu (see Figure 117 on page 282

), select TDS from the first drop down box to add a TDS loop.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 282 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Figure 117

Loop configuration

The TDS loop configuration page appears (see Figure 118).

4

Enter the TDS loop number (0 – 255).

Figure 118

TDS Loop configuration

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 283 of 484

5

Click Save. It does not become available until a loop number has been entered and TAB has been used to move the cursor.

The following message box appears:

Figure 119

Confirmation

6

Click OK to complete the configuration.

The updated loop configuration page appears (see Figure 120). The new

Conference loop is displayed.

Figure 120

Loop configuration (updated)

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 284 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

Configuring DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway channels

Procedure 62 describes how to configure DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway

channels using the Command Line Interface (CLI). To configure DSP

Daughterboard Voice gateway channels using Element Manager see Steps 5

and 6 of Procedure 59 on page 273 .

MG XPEC considerations

For DB32, if the TN is on an MG XPEC an SCH2303 error message is printed. DB32 cannot be configured on this type of IPMG.

For DB96, if the TN is on an MG XPEC and the card is not between 8 and 13, an SCH2304 error message is printed. DB96 can only be configured on card slots 8,9,10,11,12,13.

CP MG considerations

For DB96, if the TN is on a CP MG a SCH2303 error message is printed.

DB96 cannot be configured for this type of IPMG.

Perform the following procedure to configure DSP resources using the CLI.

Procedure 62

Configure DSP Daughterboard Voice gateway channels (CLI)

1

Enter LD 14

>LD 14

REQ new 32

TYPE vgw

TN 4 0 0 0

DES db32

XTRK db32

CUST 0

NEW TRK TN 004 0 00 00 RT 0 MB 0

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 15721651 USED U P: 6241131 26590

TOT: 21989372

DISK SPACE NEEDED: 24 KBYTES

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring the Media Gateway

Page 285 of 484

2MB BACKUP DISKETTE(S) NEEDED: 1 (PROJECTED LD43 - BKO)

TNS AVAIL: 32751 USED: 16 TOT: 32767

...

>LD 20

REQ: prt

TYPE: vgw

TN <enter>

CDEN <enter>

CUST <enter>

XTRK <enter>

DATE <enter>

PAGE <enter>

DES DB32

TN 004 0 00 00 VIRTUAL

TYPE VGW

CUST 0

XTRK DB32

ZONE 004

...

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 286 of 484

Configuring the Media Gateway

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

298

Page 287 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R

Terminal Server

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Configuring a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Telnet to CS 1000E COM port from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Configuring an rlogin port for various applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem . . . . . 297

CS 1000E COM port types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Introduction

Many third-party applications require serial port interfaces to provide a connection to a PBX. As well, support staff traditionally use serial ports to connect maintenance terminals and modems to a system for maintenance. As the CS 1000E Call Server provides only two local serial ports for these purposes, an IP-based Terminal Server is required to provide the necessary standard serial ports for applications.

The CS 1000E system currently supports the MRV LX8020S-102AC-R

(ROHS) Terminal Server. The IR-8020M-101 (non-ROHS) is no longer supported. This chapter contains information on connecting the

LX8020S-102AC-R.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 288 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

The Terminal Servers can be located anywhere on the LAN. One connection from each Call Server COM1 port is connected to the Terminal Server.

Up to 16 TTY ports can be configured with the CS 1000E Call Server. The

Terminal Servers can be used as a central point to manage several devices through their serial ports.

Terminal Servers are used with the CS 1000E system to provide serial connections for accessing the CS 1000E COM ports. The user can access each

COM port from a local PC through telnet sessions or from a remote PC by dialing the on-board modem.

The Terminal Servers provide IP connections to each Pseudo TTY (PTY) ports 0-15 for monitoring CDR and traffic reports.

The LX8020S-102AC-R – LX Series Standalone has 20 Console Ports and a

V.90 internal modem. A 19-inch rack-mount kit is provided with the unit.

The DIAG port at the front end of the MRV LX8020S-102AC-R is the default management port. It will be used for primary configuration of the IP address, mask address and gateway address. The 20 Ports at the rear can be configured for Serial Data Interface for CS 1000E system components.

IMPORTANT!

Before connecting the Terminal Server to another component of the

CS 1000E system, read and understand the documentation provided by the Terminal Server’s manufacturer including the Quick Start Guide for

MRV server, LX Series Configuration Guide and MRV LX Series

Commands Reference Guide.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 63: "Connecting a Terminal Server to the system" on page 290

•

Procedure 64: "Configure IP address for the Terminal Server" on page 291

•

Procedure 65: "Running telnet from PC" on page 292

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Page 289 of 484

•

Procedure 66: "Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet

Terminal Server" on page 293

•

Procedure 67: "Configuring an rlogin port for various applications" on page 294

•

Procedure 68: "Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem" on page 297

Configuring a Terminal Server

Follow Procedure 63 to connect a Terminal Server with a CS 1000E system.

Table 25 lists the MRV cables required to install the LX8020S-102AC-R

Terminal Server in a CS 1000E system.

Table 25

Required MRV serial cables and connectors

Order Code

NTDU6302

NTDU6303

P/N-151-3028

P/N-350-0308

Description

Connects MRV Terminal Server to any standard

DTE port or DCE port when a Null modem is used

Used for telnet, rlogin connections

Male RJ-45 to Male RJ-45 with connectors,

10 feet

Female RJ-45 to Female DB9

Customer-made cables with the following pin out can also be used. See Table

26.

Table 26

Customer made cable pin out (same as NTDU6302)

Pins on DB9 Female

1

6

2

DCD

DSR

RXD

Pins on RJ-45 Male (MRV Terminal Server)

2 DTR

3 TxD

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 290 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

7

8

9

Table 26

Customer made cable pin out (same as NTDU6302)

Pins on DB9 Female

3

4

5

TXD

DTR

S GND

RTS

CTS

N/C

Pins on RJ-45 Male (MRV Terminal Server)

4

5

1

6

7

8

RxD

DSR/DCD

TxD GND

RxD GND

CTS

RTS

Procedure 63

Connecting a Terminal Server to the system

1

Connect the above mentioned MRV serial cable from the Terminal Server

Diag port at the front of the Terminal Server to the PC COM port.

2

Start the MRV HyperTerminal application. In Windows:

Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication >

HyperTerminal.exe

3

Configure HyperTerminal to communicate with the Terminal Server’s management port:

a.

Set baud rate to 9600.

b.

Set data bits to 8.

c.

Set parity to none.

d.

Set stop bit to 1.

e.

Set flow control to “None”.

f.

Set Terminal Emulation to VT100.

g.

Press <CR> until you receive a log-in prompt.

4

Log in to the Terminal Server. Enter:

Log in:

InReach

<Enter>

Password

access

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Page 291 of 484

5

To log into Superuser mode:

InReach: 0 >enable <enter>

6

Enter the default password. Enter:

System

End of Procedure

Configuring the Terminal Server IP address

Procedure 64

Configure IP address for the Terminal Server

Note:

The IP address can be configured or changed only from the local

Management/ DIAG port.

1

Configure the Terminal Server’s IP address:

InReach:0 >>config interface 1 address <ip address>

2

Configure the Terminal Server’s IP subnet mask:

InReach:0 >>config interface 1 mask <subnet mask>

3

Configure the Terminal Server’s IP primary gateway address:

InReach:0 >>config gateway <gateway ip address>

4

Save the configuration and check it:

InReach:0 >>save config flash

InReach:0 >>show system chara

InReach:0 >>show interface1 chara

Example commands:

InReach:0 >>config interface 1 address 47.11.244.101

InReach:0 >>config interface 1 mask 255.255.255.0

InReach:0>>config gateway 47.11.244.101

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 292 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port

Connect the Terminal Server ethernet port to the ELAN subnet using a CAT5 ethernet cable. The virtual management port 0 is accessible from an online PC using a telnet session. The Terminal Server can now be configured from the on-line PC.

Procedure 65

Running telnet from PC

1

In Windows, input the Telnet command

>Start > Run telnet IP address port#

Where:

IP address = Terminal Server IP address

Port# = port no. (calculation of port shown below in Procedure 67 on page 294

Example:

telnet 47.11.244.101 2100

(if it is port 1)

Note:

No port is used for the virtual management port.

2

Press <CR> until the MRV login prompt appears.

3

Input login password and username to log in to the virtual management port.

End of Procedure

Telnet to CS 1000E COM port from a PC

Connect port xx (xx = 1 - 20) of the Terminal Server to COM1 port of the

CS 1000E Call Server.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Page 293 of 484

Follow Procedure 66 to establish access to a Call Server from a PC through

telnet Terminal Server. Use the same port number for each procedure step.

Procedure 66

Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet Terminal Server

1

Connect to the management port or virtual management port as shown in

Procedure 65 on page 292

or Procedure 63 on page 290

.

2

Define the port baud rate to equal the baud rate of the CS 1000E COM port. Enter:

InReach:0 >>config port async <xx> speed <Baudrate>

InReach:0 >>config port async 1 speed 9600

Where: xx = Port number from 1-20 and BAUDRATE = the baudrate of the connected Call Server com port.

3

To avoid autohangup:

InReach:0 >>config port async <xx> no autohangup

InReach:0 >>config port async 1 no autohangup

4

Turn off authentication.Then save the configuration and check it:

InReach:0 >> config port async <xx> no authentication outbound

InReach:0 >>save config flash

InReach:0 >>show port async <xx> chara

InReach:0 >> config port async 1 no authentication outbound

InReach:0 >>save config flash

InReach:0 >>show port async 1 chara

5

Run telnet on the PC.

a.

In Windows:

Start > Run b.

Enter the Input telnet command.

TELNET xxx.xx.x.xx xxxx

Where:

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 294 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server xxx.xx.x.xx = Terminal Server IP Address xxxx = telnet port (for port 1 to 20)

Note:

The value of the target telnet port, xxxx, is determined using the following formula:

TELNET PORT = 2 000 + (port number xx × 100)

For example, if the telnet port is 1, then:

TELNET PORT = 2 000 + (1 x 100)

= 2 000 + (100)

= = 2100

If the Terminal Server IP Address is 47.11.244.101 and the telnet port is

1, then TELNET command line is: telnet 47.11.244.101 2100

Example: telnet 47.11.244.101 (telnet to virtual management port)

End of Procedure

Configuring an rlogin port for various applications

The CS 1000E system uses Pseudo TTY (PTY) ports as TTY ports. All serial applications, such as CDR and Traffic, can be implemented through PTY ports. PTY ports are configured in LD 17. An external device, such as a printer, can access a Call Server PTY port through the Terminal Server by using a remote login (rlogin) session. Using HyperTerminal, follow

Procedure 67 to configure a transparent rlogin port.

Procedure 67

Configuring an rlogin port for various applications

1

Enable TCP keep alive timer.

TCP Keepalive feature allows to change polling intervals, number retries, etc.The TCP keep alive timer is mainly required to check if the link is up.

This procedure explains how to modify the sysctl.conf file, which contains the TCP Keepalive settings.

2

To modify the sysctl.conf file:

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Page 295 of 484

a.

Connect to the management port or virtual management port

b.

At the InReach: 0>> prompt, type shell. The shell window opens.

InReach: 0 >>shell

BusyBox v1.1.3 (2006.10.20-12:27+0000) Built-in shell

(ash)

c.

It will then go to the LX prompt as shown below. Type the below command to start editing.

LX:/config# vi sysctl.conf.

d.

Once the VI editor starts, start by pressing the letter “i” to enter the insert mode. Using the arrow keys, the cursor can be moved to the place where the settings of the keep alive timer are there so that they can be changed if required.

e.

Hit the “Esc” to exit insert mode followed by a “ZZ” to QUIT and

WRITE only if changes where made, to exit and not saving changes type: q! After the “Esc”.

i.

The following command fixes a problem with zmodem. It limits the size of the tcp window: sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="128 256 512"

Note:

The above command is typed in the sysctl.conf.

Similarly many other parameters of the keep alive timer can be modified.

Use the command: sysctl -a

Examples are (the 3 numbers are the minimum, average and maximum values):

75 ; seconds net.ipv4.tcp_keepalive_probes = 9 net.ipv4.tcp_keepalive_time = 180; in Seconds

Here the TCP keep alive timer has been changed to 3 min.

f.

After saving the changes using vi editor, exit to Inreach prompt and reboot the LX server.

InReach:0 >>reboot.

3

Enable the RLOGIN daemon on the LX.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 296 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

InReach:0>>configure rlogin enable.

4

Configure the rlogin port for various applications.

InReach: 0>> config port async xx connect command rlogin

-l user_name host_ip_address

InReach: 0 >>config port async 1 connect command rlogin -l pty8 47.11.244.101

Here PTY8 is the user name.It is the port no. used while configuring the PTY.

It has to be configured in overlay 17 of the switch

5

To bring up a connection from the LX to some device on LAN

InReach: 0>> config port async xx access local

6

To build up the autoconnection to a specified IP client

InReach:0>>config port async n connect command telnet n.n.n.n

where n = the port number you are configuring, and n.n.n.n = the IP address of the host

7

Prevent authentication inbound or outbound. These commands disable authentication on the LX port which would prevent the ability to make a connection without intervention.

InReach:0>>config port async n no authentication outbound

InReach:0>>config port async n no authentication inbound

8

To avoid autohangup:

InReach:0 >>config port async <nn> no autohangup

Here are the commands you would perform on an IR to do the same thing;

Note: DEFINE/SET PORT port-list AUTOCONNECT ENABLED

DEFINE/SET PORT port-list AUTOHANGUP DISABLED

9

Enable the transparency mode and save the configuration information.

InReach:0>> config port async xx no telnet negotiation

InReach:0>> config port async xx transparency enable

InReach:0>> config port async xx flowcontrol cts

InReach:0 >>save config flash

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Page 297 of 484

Note 1:

It is not advisable to use putty software while trying to do rlogin

Note 2:

MRV definition of autoconnect: In Procedure 66 on page 293

and Procedure 67 on page 294

this feature of autoconnect is required.

This command is used to specify whether or not the port will automatically connect to either a dedicated service or a preferred service when the user logs onto a port. Autoconnect is automatically enabled for a port when a dedicated or preferred service is defined for that port. However, it is not disabled when service is disabled.Autoconnect also specifies whether or not the port should attempt to re-connect a session when a connection failure occurs.

Re-connection attempts occur at intervals specified by the SERVER

KEEPALIVE TIMER command (between 10 and 180 seconds), and a status message displays whenever ports that are not configured with a dedicated service attempt to connect (no messages are given for ports that are configured with a dedicated service). Re-connection attempts continue until a connection is made or the user terminates further attempts by entering the local command mode.

Finally, Autoconnect helps control In-Reach Element Manager activity when the port uses modem control signals (for example, a port connected to a dial-up line). Before you can enable Autoconnect, you must define the port for

LOCAL access, enable MODEM CONTROL, and define a dedicated service.

End of Procedure

Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem

Procedure 68

Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on-board modem

1

Connect an analog phone line to the MRV phone line (Telco) port.

2

Set up the rlogin connection using Procedure 67 on page 294 .

3

Dial in to the MRV onboard modem from the PC. This can be done after configuring the modem port as Rlogin.

4

From the PC, run HyperTerminal. Enter the command:

ATD [phone no.]

Screen response:

CONNECT 9600/ARQ/V34/LAPM/V42BIS

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 298 of 484

Connecting an MRV LX8020S-102AC-R Terminal Server

Login

5

Log in to the LX-series Element Manager using the default password,

(see steps 4,5,6,and 7 in Procedure 63 on page 290 ).

Once logged into the onboard modem, it is possible to telnet to ports 1-20.It is also possible to rlogin to different IPs.

IMPORTANT!

For this version of the LX series, always remember that the modem port is 21.And this port can be configured as telnet or rlogin port.

End of Procedure

CS 1000E COM port types

Table 27 lists various components of the CS 1000E system and their COM

port types.

Table 27

System components and COM port type

System component

A0852632 Media Card L-adapter

A0870611 MIRAN L-adapter

P0609204 Media Card L-adapter

P0609205 MIRAN L-adapter

NTDU14 Gateway

COM port type

9-pin DCE (female)

9-pin DCE (female)

9-pin DTE (male)

9-pin DTE (male)

9-pin DTE (male) (modified to isolate pins 6, 7, and 8)

Use PORT 0 of NTBK48AA 3-port

SDI cable.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

306

Page 299 of 484

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Setting the TTY terminal port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Traditional terminal SDI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

CS 1000E CP PM Call Server serial port connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

MG 1000E SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Voice Gateway Media Card SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Voice Gateway Media Card SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Voice Gateway Media Card SDI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Introduction

In the CS 1000E system, each component (CP PM Call Server, Media

Gateway, Signaling Server, and Layer 2 switch) has a Serial Data Interface

(SDI) port to be used for software installation and maintenance access. The

SDI port can be accessed by running a Telnet session through the Terminal

Server locally or remotely. See “Configuring a Terminal Server” on page 289

for Terminal Server Setup. The SDI port can also be accessed by a local terminal through the SDI connection.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 300 of 484

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Setting the TTY terminal port

A TTY terminal can be any standard PC running terminal software, (for example, HyperTerminal). The TTY terminal port must be configured as:

• Bits per second - Baud rate must be the same as the speed of SDI port.

• Data bits - 8

• Parity- None

• Stop bit – 1

• Flow control – None

• Terminal Emulation- VT100

Traditional terminal SDI connection

Figure 121 shows the setup values for a traditional terminal setup.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Page 301 of 484

Figure 121

VT220 setup values

Global Set-Up

On Line

Sessions on Comm1

CRT Saver

Display Set-Up

80 Columns

Interpret Controls

Auto Wrap

Jump Scroll

General Set-up

VT200 Mode, 7-bit Controls

User Defined Keys Unlocked

User Features Unlocked

Multinational

Communications Set-Up

Transmit=2400

Receive=Transmit

Xoff at 64

8bits, No Parity

1 Stop Bit

Printer Set-Up

Speed=9600

Normal Print Mode

8bits, No Parity,

1 Stop bit

Keyboard Set-up

Typewriter Keys

Caps Lock

Auto Repeat

Keyclick High

Margin Bell

Tab Set-Up Screen

Leave this screen at the default values

Comm1=RS232

Printer Shared

Light Text, Dark Screen

Cursor

Block Style Cursor

70Hz

Application Keypad

Normal Cursor Keys

No New Line

No Local Echo

Data Leads Only

Disconnect, 2 s Delay

Limited Transmit

Print Full Page

Print National Only

No Terminator

Warning Bell

Break

Answerback=

Not Concealed

CS 1000E CP PM Call Server serial port connections

There aretwo serial ports on the CP PM Call Server, Port 0 and Port 1. They are accessed through an NTAK19 cable that attaches to the MDF port at the back of the chassis or cabinet. Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. The supported TTY settings for both ports are:

• Baud rate - 9600

• Data bit - 8

• Stop bit - 1

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 302 of 484

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

• Parity - none

• Flow control - none

The baudrate setting can be changed in Overlay 17, however changing this setting is not recommended since it will only used when SL1 is loaded.

Note that only the Port 0 serial port displays the boot sequence from BIOS,

Bootrom & OS before the call server application is started. Port 1 will only start displaying output when call server application is started (Sysload

Phase1).

Note: You do not require the NTAK19 cable for CP PM cards installed in slots 22 or 23 of an MG 1010 chassis. The Server serial connections for slots 22 and 23 are provided by the MG 1010 Media Gateway Utility

(MGU) card.

MG 1000E SDI connection

SDI connection to the MG 1000E is made at the back. See Figure 122 on page 303

for location of the 9-pin DTE (male) connector. It is modified to isolate pins 6, 7, and 8. Use PORT0 of NTBK48AA 3-port SDI cable for terminal connection.

Note: Connection must be made initially to each MG 1000E to set the

IP address.

MGC serial ports

Each Gateway Controller installed in a CS 1000E provides 3 remote SDIs.

The maximum number of TTYs does not change. Therefore, once the maximum TTYs are configured, no additional TTYs are supported.

The MGC and CP MG provide three Gateway Controller serial ports: SDI0,

SDI1 and SDI2.

The serial ports can be used for local debug purposes or can be configured in the CS 1000E Call Server as system terminals in Overlay 17.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Page 303 of 484

During initial configuration either SDI0 or SDI1 must be connected to access the installation menu.

Note: Only SDI0 has full modem support, as SDI1 and SDI2 do not have hardware flow control.

SDI2 is not available during the Gateway Controller bootup, it cannot be used to access the installation menus.

All of the SDI ports on the Gateway Controller are configured via software.

There are no DIP switches on the Gateway Controller for configuring the baud rate of SDI0.

Procedure 69

Connecting SDI ports on the Media Gateways

1

Connect the NTBK48 3-port SDI cable to the 9-pin SDI port (RS-232) at

the rear of the Media Gateways (see Figure 122).

Figure 122

SDI port access to the Media Gateway MGC card

SDI port

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 304 of 484

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

2

Connect the system terminal to the cable marked “port 0” on the NTBK48

3-port cable. You require a Modem Eliminator adapter to connect the system to a TTY terminal. This adapter is included in the CS 1000E and the Media Gateway cable kits.

3

If the system is accessed remotely, connect the system modem to the cable marked “port 1” on the NTBK48 cable.

4

When instructed, connect the modem to an outside line.

5

When instructed, test the modem for correct operation when the system is operating.

Note:

You can use the remaining ports for other equipment, such as

CDR devices or TTYs.

End of Procedure

Voice Gateway Media Card SDI connection

The SDI ports on a Voice Gateway Media Card can be used for basic

configuration or maintenance. Figure 123 shows the maintenance port

location on the Voice Gateway Media Card and the Shielded 50-pin to Serial/

ELAN/TLAN adapter.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

Page 305 of 484

Figure 123

Maintenance port location on the Voice Gateway Media Card and the

Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter

Shielded 50-pin to

Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter

Maintenance port

The Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate provides a female 8-pin mini-DIN serial maintenance port connection. The maintenance port on the Shielded

50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter provides an alternative to the faceplate maintenance port. Both are DTE ports with a speed of 9600 bit/s.

CAUTION — Service Interruption

Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I/O panel DB-9 male serial maintenance port at the same time.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 306 of 484

Configuring a terminal and SDI ports

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

336

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 307 of 484

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Circuit card options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Digital trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Connecting a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Universal Trunk card connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

E&M Trunk card connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Trunk connections (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Trunk connections (UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Verifying trunk functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Introduction

The following sections outline the placement of circuit cards in the Media

Gateways and Media Gateway Expander. Analog trunks can be installed in

MG 1010, MG 1000E and Media Gateway Expander. For information about the circuit cards ,see Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 308 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

IMPORTANT!

Digital Trunk cards can be installed only in slots 1 to 4 of the

Media Gateway 1000E. Digital Trunk cards can be installed in slots 1-10 of the Media Gateway 1010.

Figure 124 shows the circuit card slots in a Media Gateway 1000E. To view

the circuit card slots available in a Media Gateway Expander, see Figure 125 on page 309 .

Figure 124

Circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway 1000E

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 309 of 484

Figure 125

Circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway Expander

SLOT

10

SLOT

9

SLOT

8

SLOT

7

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8

Slot 7

553-CSE9032

WARNING

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Avoid installing telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 310 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Before you proceed, install the cable from the slot that contains the Line card

associated with the telephone being connected. Refer to “Installing the Main

Distribution Frame” on page 371

, if you require additional cable installation.

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

Refer to the Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for full descriptions of country-specific circuit cards and their installation procedures.

CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES

Always handle circuit cards with caution to avoid damage caused by static electricity. Always store circuit cards that are not in use in an antistatic bag or the original packaging

Wear an antistatic wrist strap, such as the one shown in

Figure 126 on page 311 , when handling circuit cards.

Static electricity can damage circuit card components.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 311 of 484

Figure 126

Antistatic wrist strap

Antistatic wrist strap

Circuit card options

A circuit card that has a switch symbol on its faceplate is equipped with option switches, strapping plugs, or both. Ensure that the option switches or strapping plugs are set correctly. Circuit cards can also have daughterboards or other add-on devices installed on them.

Digital trunk cards

Digital trunk cards can be installed only in slots 1 to 4 in a Media Gateway.

The following Digital trunk cards can be installed:

• NTAK09 1.5 Mbit DTI/PRI

• NTAK10 2.0 Mbit DTI

• NTAK79 2.0 Mbit PRI

• NTBK22 MISP

• NTBK50 2.0 Mbit PRI

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 312 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

• NTRB21 TMDI 1.5 Mbit DTI/PRI

• NT6D70 SILC

• NT6D71 UILC

Note: Now NT6D70 SILC and NT6D71 UILC Digital trunk cards can be installed in slots 7 to 10 in a Media Gateway Expander.

For additional information about installing Digital trunk cards, refer to the following documents:

• ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(NN43001-301)

• ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(NN43001-318)

• ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-717)

• ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718)

Connecting a trunk

Follow Procedure 70 to connect a trunk.

Procedure 70

Connecting a trunk

1

From the assignment record, determine the location of the trunk connection and its associated Terminal Number (TN) at the cross-connect terminal.

2

With cross-connect wire, connect the trunk to the TN.

Make sure that the wiring is not reversed and that it is on the correct terminals.

•

Table 28 on page 313

to Table 30 on page 316 list the connections

for trunks.

•

For European trunk connections, see Table 31 on page 318

to

Table 39 on page 327 .

•

For UK trunk connections, see Table 40 on page 329

to Table 46 on page 336 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 313 of 484

Note:

See “Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit” on page 439

for connecting trunks with the PFTU.

End of Procedure

Universal Trunk card connections

The Universal Trunk card (NT8D14) provides eight Analog trunks that can

function in the modes identified in Table 28. Refer to Table 29 on page 314

for the connections to the Universal trunk at the cross-connect terminal.

Table 28

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card – modes and option settings

Modes Location

Central (CO)

2-way TIE trunk (loop Dial Repeat)

2-way TIE trunk (Outgoing Incoming

Dial)

Recorded Announcement (RAN)

Paging trunk

Japan CO/DID operation

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2

J1, J2 DID operation

Loop length>2000 ohms

DID operation

Loop length <2000 ohms

J1, J2

Note 1:

OFF indicates that no strap is present.

Note 2:

J1 and J2 locations apply to all eight trunks.

Jumper strap

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 314 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 29

NT8D14 Universal Trunk connections (Part 1 of 2)

Cable from equipment Unit

RAN mode

Pair

6T

6R

7T

7R

4T

4R

5T

5R

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

10T

10R

11T

11R

8T

8R

9T

9R

12T

12R

Color

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

0

1

2

3

4

5

CP

MB

T3

R3

CP

MB

T2

R2

T0

R0

CP

MB

T1

R1

CP

MB

T5

R5

CP

MB

T4

R4

CP

MB

Paging mode

Designations

A

PG

T3

R3

A

PG

T2

R2

T0

R0

A

PG

T1

R1

A

PG

T5

R5

A

PG

T4

R4

A

PG

All other modes

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 315 of 484

Table 29

NT8D14 Universal Trunk connections (Part 2 of 2)

Cable from equipment Unit

RAN mode

Pair Color

13T

13R

BK-G

G-BK

6

14T

14R

15T

15R

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

16T

16R

Y-BL

BL-Y

Note:

Remaining pairs are spare.

7

T6

R6

CP

MB

T7

R7

CP

MB

Paging mode

Designations

T6

R6

A

PG

T7

R7

A

PG

All other modes

T6

R6

T7

R7

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 316 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

E&M Trunk card connections

Table 30 lists the connections required by the E&M Trunk card (NT8D15).

Table 30

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card (Part 1 of 2)

Pair

5T

5R

6T

6R

3T

3R

4T

4R

7T

7R

8T

8R

1T

1R

2T

2R

Cables

Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment

Color

W-BL

BL-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

Unit

0

1

2W

Paging mode

T0

R0

A

PG

T1

R1

A

PG

2W

Type 1 mode

4W

Type 1 mode

T0

R0

Designations

TA

TB

E

M

T1

R1

E

M

RA

RB

E

M

ESC

ESCG

TA

TB

RA

RB

E

M

ESC

ESCG

4W

Type 2 mode

TA

TB

EA

EB

MA

MB

TA

TB

RA

RB

RA

RB

EA

EB

MA

MB

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 317 of 484

Table 30

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card (Part 2 of 2)

Cables

Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment Unit

2W

Paging mode

2W

Type 1 mode

4W

Type 1 mode

Pair Color

9T

9R

R-BR

BR-R

T2

R2

T2

R2

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

13T

13R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

2

A

PG

T3

R3

E

M

T3

R3

14T

14R

15T

15R

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

3

E

M

16T

16R

Y-BL

BL-Y

A

PG

Note:

A and B are the transmit and receive pairs, where:

TA = Transmit Tip, and RA = Receive Tip

TB = Transmit Ring, and RB = Receive Ring

Designations

TA

TB

RA

RB

E

M

ESC

ESCG

TA

TB

RA

RB

E

M

ESC

ESCG

4W

Type 2 mode

TA

TB

RA

RB

EA

EB

MA

MB

MA

MB

TA

TB

RA

RB

EA

EB

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 318 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Trunk connections (Europe)

Trunk connections for Europe are provided in the following tables:

•

Table 31: “E&M TIE trunk card (2-Wire)” on page 318

•

Table 32: “E&M 2-wire Type 2” on page 319

•

Table 33: “E&M TIE Trunk card (4-Wire)” on page 320

•

Table 34: “E&M TIE Trunk card” on page 322

•

Table 35: “E&M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections” on page 323

•

Table 36: “E&M 2-wire Recorded Announcement Trunk connections” on page 324

•

Table 37: “E&M 2-wire Music Trunk connections” on page 325

•

Table 38: “Central Office & Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections” on page 325

•

Table 39: “Central Office Trunk connections” on page 327

Table 31

E&M TIE trunk card (2-Wire) (Part 1 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through Card 10 from equipment

Unit Pair

3T

3R

4T

4R

1T

1R

2T

2R

Color

W-O

O-W

W-BR

BR-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-G

G-R

0

1

Pins

31

6

33

8

27

2

29

4

T1

R1

A

PG

T0

R0

A

PG

Column 1

Paging

Column 2

Paging

Lead Designations

T0

R0

SIGB

SIGA

T1

R1

SIGB

SIGA

Column 3

Type 5

(BPO)

T1

R1

E

M

T0

R0

E

M

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 319 of 484

Table 31

E&M TIE trunk card (2-Wire) (Part 2 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through Card 10

7T

7R

8T

8R

5T

5R

6T

6R

from equipment

R-S

S-R

BK-O

O-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

2

3

35

10

37

12

39

14

41

16

Column 1

Paging

T2

R2

A

PG

T3

R3

A

PG

Column 2

Paging

T2

R2

SIGB

SIGA

T3

R3

SIGB

SIGA

Column 3

Type 5

(BPO)

T3

R3

E

M

T2

R2

E

M

Table 32

E&M 2-wire Type 2 (Part 1 of 2)

Lead designations

T1

R1

E1

E2

M1

M2

T0

R0

E1

E2

M1

M2

Pins

31

6

32

7

33

8

27

2

28

3

29

4

Pair color

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-G

G-W

Unit number

0

1

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 320 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 32

E&M 2-wire Type 2 (Part 2 of 2)

T3

R3

E1

E2

M1

M2

T2

R2

E1

E2

M1

M2

39

14

40

15

41

16

35

10

36

11

37

12

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

2

3

Table 33

E&M TIE Trunk card (4-Wire) (Part 1 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment

Column 1

Type 1 & 5

Unit

# Pair

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

Color

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

0

Pins

26

1

27

2

28

3

Column 2

Type 1 & 5

Lead Designations

RA

RB

TA

TB

E

M

TA

TB

RA

RB

E

M

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 321 of 484

Table 33

E&M TIE Trunk card (4-Wire) (Part 2 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment

Column 1

Type 1 & 5

Column 2

Type 1 & 5

6T

6R

7T

7R

4T

4R

5T

5R

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-BR

BR-R

1

32

7

34

9

30

5

31

6

E

M

RA

RB

RA

RB

TA

TB

8T

8R

9T

9R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

2

35

10

36

11

TA

TB

E

M

RA

RB

E

M

10T

10R

11T

11R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR-

BR-BK

38

13

39

14

RA

RB

TA

TB

TA

TB

RA

RB

3

12T

12R

BK-S

S-BK

40

15

E

M

E

M

Note:

The cable pair designated TA, TB is the transmit pair. The pair designated RA, RB is the receive pair.

E

M

TA

TB

TA

TB

RA

RB

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 322 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 34

E&M TIE Trunk card (Part 1 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment

Unit

# Pair

6T

6R

7T

7R

4T

4R

5T

5R

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

10T

10R

11T

11R

8T

8R

9T

9R

12T

12R

Color

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

0

1

2

Pins

31

6

32

7

29

4

30

5

26

1

27

2

28

3

35

10

36

11

33

8

34

9

37

12

Column 1

Type 2

Column 2

Type 2

Lead Designations

TA

TB

E1

E2

M1

M2

RA

RB

RA

RB

TA

TB

E1

E2

TA

TB

E1

E2

M1

M2

RA

RB

M1

M2

SIG0A

SIG0B

RA

RB

TA

TB

E

M

RA

RB

TA

TB

E

M

SIG1A

SIG1B

RA

RB

TA

TB

E

M

SIG2A

SIG2B

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 323 of 484

Table 34

E&M TIE Trunk card (Part 2 of 2)

Cables Card 1 through

Card 10 from equipment

13T

13R

BK-G

G-BK

38

13

Column 1

Type 2

RA

RB

Column 2

Type 2

RA

RB

3

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

39

14

40

15

41

16

TA

TB

E1

E2

M1

M2

TA

TB

E

M

SIG3A

SIG3B

Note:

The cable pair designated TA, TB is the transmit pair. The pair designated RA, RB is the receive pair.

Table 35

E&M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections (Part 1 of 2)

Lead designations

TA

TB

RA

RB

TA

TB

RA

RB

Pins

26

1

27

2

30

5

31

6

Pair color

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

Unit number

0

1

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 324 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 35

E&M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections (Part 2 of 2)

TA

TB

RA

RB

TA

TB

RA

RB

34

9

35

10

38

13

39

14

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

2

3

Table 36

E&M 2-wire Recorded Announcement Trunk connections

Lead designations

T2

R2

SIG B

SIG A

T3

R3

SIG B

SIG A

T0

R0

SIG B

SIG A

T1

R1

SIG B

SIG A

Pins

38

13

41

16

34

9

37

12

30

5

33

8

26

1

29

4

Pair color

R-BR

BR-R

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

W-BL

BL-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-G

G-R

Unit number

0

1

2

3

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 325 of 484

Table 37

E&M 2-wire Music Trunk connections

Lead designations

T2

R2

T3

R3

T0

R0

T1

R1

Pins

34

9

38

13

26

1

30

5

Pair color

W-BL

BL-W

W-S

S-W

R-BR

BR-R

BK-G

G-BK

Unit number

2

3

0

1

Table 38

Central Office & Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections (Part 1 of 2)

Pair

3T

3R

4T

4R

1T

1R

2T

2R

5T

5R

6T

6R

Cable from equipment

Color

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

Unit

0

1

2

Pins

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

2

30

5

31

6

Column 1

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

Column 2

Lead designations

T0

R0

PPM0

—

T1

R1

PPM1

—

T2

R2

PPM2

—

Column 3

A0

B0

C0

Spare

A1

B1

C1

Spare

A2

B2

C2

Spare

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 326 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 38

Central Office & Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections (Part 2 of 2)

Cable from equipment Column 1 Column 2

Pair

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

13T

13R

7T

7R

8T

8R

9T

9R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

Color

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Unit

3

4

5

6

7

Pins

37

12

38

13

35

10

36

11

32

7

33

8

34

9

39

14

40

15

41

16

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

T7

R7

Column 3

Lead designations

T3

R3

PPM3

—

T4

R4

PPM4

—

T5

R5

PPM5

—

T6

R6

PPM6

—

T7

R7

PPM7

—

C4

Spare

A5

B5

C5

Spare

A6

B6

A3

B3

C3

Spare

A4

B4

C6

Spare

A7

B7

C7

Spare

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 327 of 484

Table 39

Central Office Trunk connections (Part 1 of 2)

Cable from equipment

Pair

6T

6R

7T

7R

4T

4R

5T

5R

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

10T

10R

11T

11R

8T

8R

9T

9R

12T

12R

Color

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

Unit

0

1

2

Pins

31

6

32

7

29

4

30

5

26

1

27

2

28

3

35

10

36

11

33

8

34

9

37

12

Lead designations

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 328 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 39

Central Office Trunk connections (Part 2 of 2)

Cable from equipment

Pair

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

Color

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Unit

3

Pins

38

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

Lead designations

T3

R3

Trunk connections (UK)

Trunk connections for the UK are provided in the following tables:

•

Table 40: “NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations” on page 329

•

Table 41: “NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross-connect terminations” on page 330

•

Table 42: “NT5K19 2W paging mode terminations” on page 332

•

Table 43: “NT5K19 2W Type 1 mode terminations” on page 332

•

Table 44: “NT5K19 4W Type 1 mode terminations” on page 334

•

Table 45: “NT5K19 AC15 mode pair terminations” on page 335

•

Table 46: “NT5K19 Recorded Announcement mode pair terminations” on page 336

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 329 of 484

Table 40

NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations (Part 1 of 2)

Unit Pair

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

Pins

32

7

33

8

30

5

31

6

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

2

36

11

37

12

34

9

35

10

38

13

Pair color

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 330 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 40

NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations (Part 2 of 2)

Pair Unit

T7

R7

Pins

39

14

40

15

41

16

Pair color

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

7

Note: The connections on the NT5K18 Exchange Line Trunk card are polarity-sensitive. Make sure the ground side of the trunk is connected to the A leg of the NT5K18 circuit. Make sure the -50 Volt side of the trunk is connected to the B leg of the NT5K18 circuit.

Table 41

NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross-connect terminations

(Part 1 of 2)

Pair

T0

R0

T1

R1

T2

R2

Pins

29

4

30

5

31

6

26

1

27

2

28

3

Pair color

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

Unit

0

1

2

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 331 of 484

Table 41

NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross-connect terminations

(Part 2 of 2)

Unit Pair

T3

R3

T4

R4

T5

R5

T6

R6

T7

R7

Pins

37

12

38

13

35

10

36

11

32

7

33

8

34

9

39

14

40

15

41

16

Pair color

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

3

4

5

6

7

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 332 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Pair

T3

R3

A

PG

T2

R2

A

PG

T1

R1

A

PG

T0

R0

A

PG

Note: The speech pairs on the NT5K19 card are polarity-insensitive.

The E&M signaling pairs, however, are polarity-sensitive. Make sure the ground side of the trunk is connected to the A leg of the NT5K19 circuit.

Make sure the -50 Volt side of the trunk is connected to the B leg.

Table 42

NT5K19 2W paging mode terminations

Pins

39

14

41

16

35

10

37

12

31

6

33

8

27

2

29

4

Pair color

R-S

S-R

BK-O

O-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

W-O

O-W

W-BR

BR-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-G

G-R

Unit

0

1

2

3

Table 43

NT5K19 2W Type 1 mode terminations (Part 1 of 2)

Pair

T0

R0

E

M

Pins

27

2

28

3

Pair color

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

Unit

0

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 333 of 484

Table 43

NT5K19 2W Type 1 mode terminations (Part 2 of 2)

Pair

T2

R2

E

M

T1

R1

E

M

T3

R3

E

M

Pins

35

10

36

11

31

6

32

&

39

14

40

15

Pair color

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Unit

1

2

3

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 334 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 44

NT5K19 4W Type 1 mode terminations

Pair

TA

TB

RA

RB

TA

RB

E

M

E

M

RA

RB

TA

TB

RA

RB

RA

TB

E

M

E

M

TA

TB

Pins

34

9

35

10

31

6

32

7

28

3

30

5

26

1

27

2

39

14

40

15

36

11

38

13

Pair color

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-S

S-W

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Unit

0

1

2

3

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Page 335 of 484

Table 45

NT5K19 AC15 mode pair terminations

Pair

TA

TB

RA

TB

TA

TB

RA

RB

TA

TB

RA

RB

TA

TB

RA

RB

Pins

38

13

39

14

34

9

35

10

30

5

31

6

26

1

27

2

Pair color

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

Unit

0

1

2

3

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 336 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a trunk card

Table 46

NT5K19 Recorded Announcement mode pair terminations

Unit Pair

T2

R2

SIG B

SIG A

T3

R3

SIG B

SIG A

T0

R0

SIG B

SIG A

T1

R1

SIG B

SIG A

Pins

38

13

41

16

34

9

37

12

30

5

33

8

26

1

29

4

Pair color

R-BR

BR-R

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

W-BL

BL-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-G

G-R

0

1

2

3

Verifying trunk functionality

You can now use the trunks. To test the trunks, make trunk calls.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

370

Page 337 of 484

Installing and configuring a

Voice Gateway Media Card

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Configuring a card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Adding a card to an IP telephony node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager . . . . . . . 345

Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Saving configuration changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Installing a Compact Flash (CF) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Installing a card in a Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Verifying a card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Disabling a card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Disabling a card unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Enabling a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Enabling a card unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Verifying functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Introduction

A Voice Gateway Media Card runs the IP Line software. It provides voice gateway channels (DSPs) to transcode voice data between IP and TDM

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 338 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

(analog/digital). The cards node properties, as well as the voice gateway channels, must be configured. The cards are installed in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander.

TPS functions are not supported on the Voice GatewayMedia Cards. They do not participate in the Election process to be come a Master if the Leader fails.

Voice Gateway Media Card is a term used to encompass the Media Card

32-port card, and the Media Card 32S card. These cards plug into an

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) shelf in the CS 1000M systems and into a Media Gateway and Media Gateway 1000E Expander in the CS 1000E system.

The Media Card 32-port and the Media Card 32S card occupy one slot.

The Media Card 32S card provides the following features:

• Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)

• two Digital Signal Processors (DSP), based on an ARM processor

• channel density of 32 ports

• cost improvement over existing Media Cards

The Media Card 32-port card provides the following features:

• 32-port card packet processing power is greater than that of the ITG-P

24-port line card

• increases the channel density from 24 to 32 ports (for the 32-port version)

• reduces the slot count from a dual IPE slot to a single IPE slot

For more details, see IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500).

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 71: "Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP telephony node" on page 340

•

Procedure 72: "Adding voice gateway channels using Element Manager" on page 345

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 339 of 484

•

Procedure 73: "Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14" on page 348

•

Procedure 74: "Installing the CF card" on page 351

•

Procedure 75: "Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot" on page 357

•

Procedure 77: "Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status" on page 360

•

Procedure 78: "Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels" on page 361

•

Procedure 79: "Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units" on page 362

•

Procedure 80: "Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway

Media Card" on page 365

•

Procedure 81: "Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element

Manager" on page 365

•

Procedure 82: "Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using

Element Manager" on page 366

•

Procedure 83: "Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element

Manager" on page 367

•

Procedure 84: "Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using

Element Manager" on page 368

Configuring a card

A Voice Gateway Media Card requires configuration of:

• the IP telephony properties defined with Element Manager (the Voice

Gateway Media Cards are assigned to an IP telephony node). See

“Configuring an IP telephony node” on page 233 .

•

the voice gateway channels defined on the CS 1000E. See “Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager” on page 345 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 340 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Adding a card to an IP telephony node

The Voice Gateway Media Card is added to an IP telephony node using

Element Manager only. See Element Manager: System Administration

(NN43001-632) for details.

Procedure 71

Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP telephony node

1

Log in to Element Manager.

2

Select IP Network > Nodes: Servers, Media Cards from the navigator.

The Node Configuration web page opens, as shown in Figure 127.

Figure 127

Node Configuration web page

3

Click Node, then click Select.

4

Choose Media Card then click Add. See Figure 128 on page 341 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 128

Add Media Card

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 341 of 484

The Cards tab expands (see Figure 129 on page 342

).

5

Enter your data for this Voice Gateway Media Card. The ELAN MAC address is on a faceplate sticker. The TN is the Voice Gateway Media

Card logical card slot.

Note:

For more detail on Voice Gateway Media Card properties, see

Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 342 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Figure 129

New media card details

6

Click Save the node.

7

Verify card has been added. See Figure 130 on page 343 .

Note 1:

In order to perform a successful "Sync and Save" (receive the updated IP Telephony node configuration files), the Media Card must be joined to the security domain using the j oinSecDomain

command from the MC32 or MC32S command line: joinSecDomain <IP Address of Primary UCM Security

Server>

See Security Management Fundamentals (NN43001-604).

Note 2:

You may also need to upgrade the Media Card’s loadware before joining the security domain. See Signaling Server IP Line

Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 130

Media Card added

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 343 of 484

8

Click Save. The Node Saved screen appears. See Figure 131 on page 344 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 344 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Figure 131

Node saved

9

Click Transfer Now. The Synchronize Configuration Files screen

appears. See Figure 132.

Figure 132

Synchronize Configuration Files

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 345 of 484

10 Select all of the elements and click Start Sync.

End of Procedure

Configuring voice gateway channels using

Element Manager

The voice gateway channels are also called “DSP channels” or the card’s

“physical TNs”. Follow Procedure 72 to configure the voice gateway

channels using Element Manager.

Note: The voice gateway channels can also be configured using LD 14.

To configure the voice gateway channels using LD 14, follow

Procedure 73 on page 348

.

Procedure 72

Adding voice gateway channels using Element Manager

1

Select IP Network > Nodes: Servers, Media Cards from the navigator.

The Node Configuration web page opens, as shown in Figure 127 on page 340 .

2

Click the + next to the desired node to expand it.

3

Click VGW Channels next to the desired card.

If no VGW channels are configured yet, an alert box is displays. Click OK to close the alert box.

The VGW channels configuration for this card opens, as shown in

Figure 133.

Figure 133

VGW Channel web page

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 346 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

4

Click Add.

The Add VGW channels web page opens, as shown in Figure 134.

Figure 134

Add VGW channels

5

Enter the appropriate parameters to configure the VGW channels.

The TN is the logical TN of the first Voice Gateway Media Card unit.

Note:

The Media Card has 32 channels.

6

Click Submit.

The VGW channels for this card are displayed. See Figure 135 on page 347 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 347 of 484

Figure 135

VGW channels list

End of Procedure

Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14

The voice gateway channels are also called “DSP channels” or the card’s

“physical TNs.” Follow Procedure 73 on page 348 to configure the voice

gateway channels using LD 14.

Note: The voice gateway channels can also be configured using Element

Manager. To configure the voice gateway channels using Element

Manager, follow Procedure 72 on page 345 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 348 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Procedure 73

Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14

1

Log in to the CS 1000E.

a.

Enter the command:

LOGI <username>

System response:

PASS?

b.

Enter the default password:

<password>

2

Access LD 14. Enter the command:

LD 14

3

Enter responses shown in Table 47.

Table 47

LD 14 – Configure physical TNs (Part 1 of 2)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

TN

DES

XTRK

Response

NEW 32

VGW l s c u aa.......a

MC32

Description

Create 32 voice Media Gateway channels on a Media Card.

Voice Gateway.

TN of the first Voice Gateway Media Card unit.

See Table 48 on page 357

for TN assignments.

Description for gateway channels.

Identify the channels using the card’s TLAN IP address or MAC address.

Media Card 32-port and the Media Card S 32-port (MC32S)

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 349 of 484

Table 47

LD 14 – Configure physical TNs (Part 2 of 2)

Prompt

MAXU

ZONE

CUST

Response

32

0-255 xx

Description

32 is the maximum number of voice Media Gateway channels on the Media Card.

Zone number to which the Voice Gateway Media Card Physical

TNs belong.

Verify that the zone exists in LD 117.

The ZONE prompt is not available when configuring VGW in an

MG 1000E. The VGWs are assigned the same zone as the

MG 1000E.

Note:

If the Zone of an MG 1000E is changed, all VGW in the

MG 1000E must be removed and reconfigured to assume the new Zone of the MG 1000E.

The customer to which the IPTN resources are assigned.

Note:

This means that for multi-customer CS 1000E systems, each customer must have a dedicated IP Telephony node for

IP Phones.

4

Exit from LD 14. Enter the command:

****

End of Procedure

Saving configuration changes

Perform a datadump to save configuration changes. Complete the steps in

Procedure 51: "Performing a datadump using Element Manager" on page 249

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 350 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Installing a Compact Flash (CF) card

The Voice Gateway Media Card requires a Compact Flash (CF) card to operate. The CF card contains the IP Line software.

CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES

Wear an antistatic device to avoid damage to the Voice

Gateway Media Card.

The Voice Gateway Media Card package includes the following:

• Media Card

• CF card and Retaining Pin (nylon pillar)

• Shielded 50-pin to Serial/ELAN/TLAN adapter

The CF card must be installed on the Voice Gateway Media Card prior to

installing the Voice Gateway Media Card in the system. Figure 136 on page 351

shows the CF card location on the Voice Gateway Media Card.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 351 of 484

Figure 136

CF card location

CF card

Procedure 74

Installing the CF card

1

Remove the Media Card and CF card from the packaging.

2

Locate the CF card socket in the lower left-hand corner of the Voice

Gateway Media Card (see Figure 137 on page 352 ).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 352 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

3

Position the CF card with the label facing up, the metal clip pulled up, and

contact pins toward the socket as shown in Figure 137.

Figure 137

Position the CF card in socket

4

Insert the CF card in the socket.

Press firmly until it is fully seated and the Eject button extends. Ensure force is applied equally at both ends of the CF card when pushing it in.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 138

Retaining pin hole

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 353 of 484

5

Gently insert the CF card, so that it is fully in contact with the connectors on the drive.

6

Push the metal clip down so that the CF card is locked in.

7

Turn the Voice Gateway Media Card over to view the back of the card.

Identify the hole for the Retaining Pin. The hole (labeled a in Figure 138)

is located approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) above the lower lock latch and 1 inch (2.5 cm) from the card’s faceplate.

8

Insert the Retaining Pin in this hole (labeled 1 in Figure 139).

Press the Retaining Pin into the hole until the pin clicks as it locks into

position (labeled 2 in Figure 139). The underside of the head of the

Retaining Pin should be flat against the card.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 354 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Figure 139

Inserting the retaining pin

9

Turn the card over to view the front of the card. Ensure the Retaining Pin is in place.

End of Procedure

Installing a card in a Media Gateway

A Voice Gateway Media Card can be installed in a Media Gateway or a

Media Gateway Expander slot. See Figure 140 on page 355

and Figure 141 on page 356 to make sure that you insert the Voice Gateway Media Card in

the correct slot.

Note: See your installation worksheet, provided by your Planning and

Engineering group for the correct slot for the Voice Gateway Media

Cards.

Figure 140 shows the circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway 1000E.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 355 of 484

Figure 140

Media Gateway 1000E card slot location

The Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) supports Voice Gateway Media Cards in slots 1 to 10.

Figure 141 on page 356 shows the circuit card assignments in the Media

Gateway Expander.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 356 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Figure 141

Media Gateway Expander card slot location

SLOT

10

SLOT

9

SLOT

8

SLOT

7

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8

Slot 7

553-CSE9032

Table 48 on page 357

shows the TN assignments for the MG 1000E.

Communication Server 1000 Release 7.0 supports up to 50 MG 1000E.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 357 of 484

Table 48

TN assignments for MG 1000E

Slots 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10

TN l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c

MG 1000E

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

000 0 01 000 0 02 000 0 03 000 0 04 000 0 07 000 0 08 000 0 09 000 0 10

000 1 01 000 1 02 000 1 03 000 1 04 000 1 07 000 1 08 000 1 09 000 1 10

004 0 01 004 0 02 004 0 03 004 0 04 004 0 07 004 0 08 004 0 09 004 0 10

004 1 01 004 1 02 004 1 03 004 1 04 004 1 07 004 1 08 004 1 09 004 1 10

008 0 01 008 0 02 008 0 03 008 0 04 008 0 07 008 0 08 008 0 09 008 0 10

008 1 01 008 1 02 008 1 03 008 1 04 008 1 07 008 1 08 008 1 09 008 1 10

012 0 01 012 0 02 012 0 03 012 0 04 012 0 07 012 0 08 012 0 09 012 0 10

12

13

14

...

8

9

10

11

012 1 01

016 0 01

016 1 01

020 0 01

020 1 01

024 0 01

024 1 01

012 1 02 012 1 03

016 0 02 016 0 03

016 1 02 016 1 03

020 0 02 020 0 03

020 1 02 020 1 03

024 0 02 024 0 03

024 1 02 024 1 03

012 1 04 012 1 07

016 0 04 016 0 07

016 1 04 016 1 07

020 0 04 020 0 07

020 1 04 020 1 07

024 0 04 024 0 07

024 1 04 024 1 07

012 1 08 012 1 09

016 0 08 016 0 09

016 1 08 016 1 09

020 0 08 020 0 09

020 1 08 020 1 09

024 0 08 024 0 09

024 1 08 024 1 09

012 1 10

016 0 10

016 1 10

020 0 10

020 1 10

024 0 10

024 1 10

...

127 252 0 01 252 0 02 252 0 03 252 0 04 252 0 07 252 0 08 252 0 09 252 0 10

128 252 1 01 252 1 02 252 1 03 252 1 04 252 1 07 252 1 08 252 1 09 252 1 10

Note:

The bottom most card slot in the Media Gateway is reserved for the MGC card.

Procedure 75

Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot

The ELAN subnet and TLAN subnet should already be connected on the back

of the Media Gateway. If not, refer back to “Installing and connecting

CS 1000E hardware” on page 153

.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 358 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Optionally, you can connect a maintenance terminal to the maintenance port on the Voice Gateway Media Card, to see the Voice Gateway Media Card’s boot messages or to perform maintenance on it. The Voice Gateway Media

Card has two serial data interface ports on the master MSP. The default tty settings for both ports are:

• Baud rate: 9600

• Data bit length: 8.

• Stop bit: 1.

• Parity: none.

• Flow control: none.

The installation menu can by accessed through either port.

1

Install the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slot.

a.

Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate.

b.

Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector.

c.

Hook the locking devices.

2

Observe the Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate display.

The red LED remains lit until the card is configured and enabled, at which point it turns off. If the card is an MC32, it will display “ITG2” when it has finished booting. If the card is an MC32S, it will display “MC32S”. See

Signaling Server IP Line Application Fundamentals (NN43001-125) for details.

3

If required, you can now perform maintenance on the card using Element

Manager, or through the card’s maintenance port if you connected a maintenance terminal to it. See Signaling Server IP Line Application

Fundamentals (NN43001-125) for detailed maintenance procedures.

4

Once the card initializes you need to upgrade the loadware to CS 1000

Release 7.0. See “Loadware upgrade” on page 225 .

5

Login with SEC_ADMIN priv (admin2)

6

Join the UCM security domain ( joinSecDomain

). For details, see

Security Management Fundamentals

(NN43001-604) .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 359 of 484

7

Save and transfer is ONLY NOW successful from Element Manager.

Note:

MC32S cards (NTDW65AAE5) prior to Pack Release 6.0 may require a manual operation for them to find the system node leader to retrieve their IP address. Older MC32S cards are not compatible with the

Linux OS bootp server and the bootp request will fail. The MC32S card uses this to request their IP address automatically. This problem has been resolved on new MC32S cards with Release 6.0 and higher.

For system upgrades where the MC32S card is already installed in an established system network, the IP address may have already been retrieved from a previous bootp attempt and saved to the card’s Flash

ROM, In this case, no manual action is required.

End of Procedure

Manually assigning the MC32S card an IP address

If the MC32S card is a new install or the system’s IP addresses are changing, you must manually connect to the MC32S card and run the setleader

command to assign the card an IP address. See Procedure 76: "Manually assigning the MC32S card an IP address" on page 359

.

Procedure 76

Manually assigning the MC32S card an IP address

1

Connect the PC to the MC32S card via com port or telnet. The TTY

Settings are:

• Baud Rate: 9600

• Data bit: 8

• Stop bit: 1

• Parity: None

• Flow Control: None

2

Power on the MC32S card.

If software was not previously installed, the card boots into the card

default "gold image". Proceed to step 7.

If software was previously installed, complete step 3 to step 6.

3

Access the pdt login prompt via either serial port or over telnet.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 360 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

4

Enter Control-p Control-d Control-t.

5

Enter the pdt username and password.

6

At the pdt>

prompt... enter the

setleader

command followed by three arguments:

setLeader [elan ip][gateway][subnetmask]

7

Interrupt the bootp process by typing

+++

8

At the "gold image" prompt

->

, type the

setleader

command.

9

Enter the information for the Elan IP address, subnet mask & gateway.

10 Answer yes to configure the card as a leader.

11 Answer no, to change the MC32S advanced parameters.

12 Answer yes, to reboot the card.

End of Procedure

Verifying a card

Verifying a card involves:

•

Procedure 77: "Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status" on page 360

•

Procedure 78: "Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels" on page 361

•

Procedure 79: "Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units" on page 362

•

Procedure 80: "Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway

Media Card" on page 365

Procedure 77

Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status

1

In Element Manager, select IP Network> Maintenance and Reports from the navigator.

The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 361 of 484

2

Expand the desired node by clicking on the + next to the Node ID.

This displays the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards belonging to the node,

3

Click Status for the desired Voice Gateway Media Card.

The output from this command is displayed in the window pane

(result box).

The output can be one of the following: xx.xxx.xxx.xxx : Disabled xx.xxx.xxx.xxx : Enabled xx.xxx.xxx.xxx : Unequipped

Where xx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the ELAN IP address of the Voice Gateway

Media Card and the meaning of the status is:

• Disabled – The card is configured but out-of-service.

• Enabled – The card is configured and operational.

• Unequipped – The card is not configured in the Call Server.

End of Procedure

Procedure 78

Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels

1

In Element Manager, select IP Network > Maintenance and Reports from the navigator.

The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens.

2

Expand the desired node by clicking on the + next to the Node ID.

This displays the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards belonging to the node.

3

Click the GEN CMD button associate with the Voice Gateway Media

Card.

The General Commands web page opens.

4

From the Group drop-down list, select Vgw.

5

From the Command drop-down list, select vgwShowAll.

6

Click RUN.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 362 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

The output of the vgwShowAll command is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the window.

7

To view the VGW Channel configuration, from the Command drop-down list, select Print VGW Channels and click the RUN button.

End of Procedure

Procedure 79

Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142. This page

allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected

functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

Figure 142

Maintenance (by Overlay) web page

2

Select Select by Functionality.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 363 of 484

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

Figure 143

Maintenance (by functionality) web page

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143.

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 364 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Figure 144

Network & Peripheral Diagnostics web page

4

Choose the STAT — Get card status command from the Card

Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 365 of 484

Procedure 80

Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142 on page 362 .

This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a

selected functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

2

Select Select by Functionality.

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143 on page 363 .

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

4

Choose the STAT — Get unit status command from the Unit

Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command

Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

Disabling a card

Follow Procedure 81 to disable a Voice Gateway Media Card using

Element Manager.

Procedure 81

Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142 on page 362 .

This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a

selected functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

2

Select Select by Functionality.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 366 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143 on page 363 .

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

4

Select the DISC – Disable Peripheral card command from the Card

Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

Note: For graceful disabling of the voice gateway channels refer to

“Graceful Disable” in IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500).

Disabling a card unit

Follow Procedure 82 to disable a Voice Gateway Media Card unit in

Element Manager.

Procedure 82

Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142 on page 362 .

This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a

selected functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

2

Select Select by Functionality.

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143 on page 363 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 367 of 484

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

4

Select the DISU – Disable unit command from the Unit Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command

Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

Enabling a card

Follow Procedure 83 to enable a Voice Gateway Media Card using

Element Manager.

Procedure 83

Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142 on page 362 .

This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a

selected functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

2

Select Select by Functionality.

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143 on page 363 .

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

4

Select the ENLC – Enable and reset card command from the Card

Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 368 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

Enabling a card unit

Follow Procedure 84 to enable a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using

Element Manager.

Procedure 84

Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager

1

Select System > Maintenance from the navigator.

The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 142 on page 362 .

This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a

selected functionality. The default is overlay, as shown in Figure 142.

2

Select Select by Functionality.

The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use,

as shown in Figure 143 on page 363 .

3

Select Network & Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in

Figure 143 on page 363 .

The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens, as shown in

Figure 144 on page 364 .

4

Select the ENLU – Enable unit command from the Unit Commands drop-down list.

5

Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command

Parameter text box.

6

Click Submit to the right of the text box.

The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page.

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

Page 369 of 484

Verifying functionality

You can now use the Voice Gateway Media Card to transcode voice data between IP and TDM. To test the voice gateway channels (DSPs), perform a variety of analog or digital calls to IP Phones and vice-versa.

Note: You require analog or digital telephones or trunks to perform this test.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 370 of 484

Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

380

Page 371 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Terminal block requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Introduction

This chapter describes how to install and connect a CS 1000E system using the BIX, or Krone Test Jack Frame (UK) cross-connect terminals.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

1

Procedure 85: “Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal” on page 372 .

2

Procedure 86: “Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame (UK)” on page 376 .

3

Procedure 87: “Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways” on page 378

.

Note: The use of the BIX system is not mandatory; however, it is the recommended option.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 372 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Terminal block requirements

The cross-connect terminal requires enough connecting blocks to terminate up to four 25 pair cables for each Media Gateway and each Media Gateway

Expander. When Ethernet connections are used instead of traditional cabling, the Media Card Input/Output adapter is used:

• For the 1.5 Mbit DTI/PRI circuit card NTRB21, use the NTBK04 cable.

• For the 2.0 Mbit DTI circuit card NTAK10, 2.0 Mbit PRI circuit card

NTAK79, and 2.0 Mbit PRI circuit card NTBK50, use the NTBK05 cable.

• Each IPE card slot equipped with a Line or Trunk card requires a 25-pair cable from the host Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander.

• Four conductors for the AUX cable from the Media Gateway.

• One 25-pair cable from each Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) QUA6.

• Wiring from telephones and trunks

DANGER

Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring, unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal

Procedure 85 describes how to install a BIX cross-connect terminal. For

detailed information, refer to the Nordex BIX documentation.

Procedure 85

Installing a BIX cross-connect terminal

1

Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross-connect terminal.

2

Lay out the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 145 on page 373 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Page 373 of 484

3

Attach labels on the cross-connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following:

• 25-pair cables from the system

• AUX wiring

• PFTUs

• Telephones and consoles

• Trunks

• Miscellaneous equipment

Figure 145

Typical BIX cross-connect terminal layout

Media Gateway

Cable Card 1

Cable Card 2

Cable Card 3

Cable Card 4

AUX cable

PFTU

Telephones

Trunks and

Miscellaneous

Media Gateway Expansion

Cable Card 7

Cable Card 8

Cable Card 9

Cable Card 10

553-CSE9026A

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 374 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK

The Krone Test Jack Frame provides terminating strips that hold ten pairs of cable. Generally, only eight of ten pairs are used. As a result, one 25-pair cable requires three terminating strips (8 pairs/strip x 3 strips = 24 pairs).

Figure 146 on page 375 shows how one 25-pair cable is divided among three

terminating strips on the Krone Test Jack Frame.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Page 375 of 484

Figure 146

25-pair cable on three Krone strips

Pair

18R

19T

19R

20T

20R

21T

21R

22T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

17T

17R

18T

22R

23T

23R

24T

24R

25T

25R

11T

11R

12T

12R

13T

13R

14T

7T

7R

8T

8R

9T

9R

10T

10R

3T

3R

4T

4R

5T

5R

6T

6R

1T

1R

2T

2R

Pin Number Wire Colour Krone Strip

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

20

46

21

47

18

44

19

45

16

42

17

43

14

40

15

41

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

36

11

37

12

38

13

39

34

9

35

10

32

7

33

8

30

5

31

6

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

2

1

2

3

553-CSE0019

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 376 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Procedure 86 describes how to install the Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK.

For detailed information, refer to the Krone documentation.

Procedure 86

Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame (UK)

1

Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross-connect terminal.

2

Lay out the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 147 on page 377 .

3

Attach labels on the cross-connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following:

• Analog Line cards

• DC15/AC15/RAN/PAG cards

• Data Access cards

• AUX wiring

• Power Fail Transfer Units

• Digital Line cards

• Telephones

• Exchange Line Trunk cards

• Direct Dialing Inward trunk cards

• Miscellaneous equipment

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Page 377 of 484

Figure 147

Typical Krone cross-connect terminal layout (UK)

Other equipment

Media Gateway

Expansion

Media Gateway

Pair

17

9

1

1

17

9

9

1

17

9

1

17

1

9

1

1

9

9

1

17

9

1

17

9

1

9

1

17

9

1

17

9

1

17

Spare

PFTU termination

AUX cable

Grounding block

Card 8

Card 7

Card 4

Card 3

Card 2

Card 1

16

8

8

8

16

8

16

16

24

16

8

24

16

8

24

24

16

8

24

24

16

8

24

16

8

16

8

24

16

8

553-CSE9033

Pair

24

16

8

6

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 378 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways

DANGER

Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

Each Media Gateway and each Media Gateway Expander requires up to four

25-pair cables. The CS 1000E requires an additional terminal block at the cross-connect terminal to terminate the 9-pin conductor auxiliary cable for the QUA6 Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) .

WARNING

Do not use the NE-A25B cable with the NTRB21,

NTAK10, NTBK50, or NTAK79 circuit cards.

Procedure 87

Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways

1

Loosen the velcro straps at each connector you plan to use.

2

Connect a 25-pair cable to each of the connectors that contains a line or trunk card. Refer to the card slot assignment plan.

3

Tag both ends of each cable with the equipment and connector numbers.

See Figure 148 on page 379 and Figure 149 on page 379

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

Page 379 of 484

Figure 148

Cable connectors at the back of the Media Gateway

Card 1

Card 2

Card 3

Card

4

25-pair connectors

Figure 149

Cable connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Expander

C ar d

1

0

C

C ar ar d 9 d

8

C ard

7

25-pair connectors

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 380 of 484

Installing the Main Distribution Frame

4

Tighten the velcro straps when you have connected each cable to the system.

5

Terminate all the 25-pair cables installed at the cross-connect terminal.

6

Label all the cables at the cross-connect terminal blocks according to the card slot assignment plan.

7

Connect the AUX cable in the upper 9-pin connector located on the top

left-hand side of the Media Gateway. See Figure 150 on page 380 .

Figure 150

AUX cable connector

AUX

8

When auxiliary power is required from the QUA6 PFTU, terminate the

AUX cable at the PFTU cross-connect terminal, according to Table 60 on page 442 .

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

426

Page 381 of 484

Installing and configuring

Nortel IP Phones

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

VoIP bandwidth management zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Configuring virtual superloops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Configuring a Nortel IP Phone using LD 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer passwords 403

Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Configuring the Nortel IP Phone boot parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration 411

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters 414

Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters . . . . . . . . . . 416

Using Set-Based Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Verifying Nortel IP Phone functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Displaying registered IP Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Upgrading firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 382 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Introduction

For detailed information on the various telephones supported on the

CS 1000E system, refer to Telephones and Consoles: Description,

Installation, and Operation (NN43001-567) and IP Phones: Description,

Installation, and Operation (NN43001-368).

The following Nortel IP Phones can be installed on a CS 1000E system:

• Nortel IP Phone 2001, Nortel IP Phone 2002, Nortel IP Phone 2004 and

Nortel IP Phone 2007

• Nortel IP Softphone 2050

• Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033

• Nortel IP Phone 1120E, Nortel IP Phone 1140E and Nortel IP Phone

1150E

• Nortel IP Phone 1110

• Expansion Module for IP Phone 1100 Series

• WLAN Handsets 2210/2211/2212

• MVC 2050

The system must be configured before the Nortel IP Phones can be installed.

The configuration includes:

• The Nortel IP Phone TN blocks must be defined on the Call Server (See

“VoIP bandwidth management zones” on page 396

or “Using Set-Based

Installation” on page 419 ).

• The IP Phones are assigned to an IP telephony node, and use the IP telephony node properties defined using Element Manager (see

“Configuring an IP telephony node” on page 233 ).

• The IP Phones require local boot parameter configuration (see

“Configuring the Nortel IP Phone boot parameters” on page 410 ).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 383 of 484

Package components for the Nortel IP Phones

Table 49 lists the Nortel IP Phone 2001 package components and product

codes.

Table 49

Nortel IP Phone 2001 components list (Part 1 of 2)

Nortel IP Phone 2001 package contents include:

• Nortel IP Phone 2001

• Handset

• Handset cord

• Footstand

• 7 ft. Cat5 Ethernet cable

• Getting Started card

Nortel IP Phone 2001(Ethergray) with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA16/A0533387

NTDU90BA16/A0533388 Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Ethergray) with English text label keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal) with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA70/A0053389

Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal) with English text label keycaps NTDU90BA70/A0533390

Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps NTDU90AB70

NTDU90AC70E6 Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps

(RoHS)

Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps

NTDU90BB70

NTDU90BC70E6 Nortel IP Phone 2001 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps (RoHS)

Replacement parts

7 ft. Cat5 Ethernet Cable

Handset, Ethergray

A0648375

A0788874

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 384 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 49

Nortel IP Phone 2001 components list (Part 2 of 2)

Handset, Charcoal

Handset cord, Ethergray; for Nortel IP Phone 2004 and Nortel IP

Phone 2001

Handset cord, Charcoal; for Nortel IP Phone 2004 and Nortel IP

Phone 2001

Nortel IP Phone 2001/2002/2004 Power Adapters

Power transformer (117/120 VAC 50/60 Hz) (North America)

A0758634

A088682

N0000764

A0619627

A0656598 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 240

VAC, 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Ireland and UK)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 230 VAC, 50/

60 Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Europe)

A0619635

Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug-in AC to AC,

8W, 240 VAC, 50 Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Australia and New

Zealand)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 100 VAC, 50

Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA

A0647042

A0828858

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 385 of 484

Table 50 lists the Nortel IP Phone 2002 package components and product

codes.

Table 50

Nortel IP Phone 2002 components list (Part 1 of 2)

Nortel IP Phone 2002 package contents include:

• Nortel IP Phone 2002

• Handset

• Handset cord

• Footstand

• 7ft Cat5 Ethernet cable

• Getting Started card

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Ethergray) with Icon keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Ethergray) with English text label keycaps

NTDU91AA16/A0533404

NTDU91BA16/A0533405

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal) with Icon keycaps NTDU91AA70/A0533406

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal) with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA70/A0533407

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps NTDU91AB70

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps

(RoHS)

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2002 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps (RoHS)

Replacement parts

7 ft. Cat5 Ethernet cable

Handset, Ethergray

Handset, Charcoal

NTDU91AC70E6

NTDU91BB70

NTDU91BC70E6

A0648375

A0788874

A0758634

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 386 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 50

Nortel IP Phone 2002 components list (Part 2 of 2)

Handset cord, Ethergray A0897725

Handset cord, Charcoal N0000763

Footstand, Charcoal (used for Ethergray and Charcoal models) A0891619

IP Phone 2001/2002/2004 Power Adaptors

Power transformer (117/120 VAC 50/60 Hz) (North America)

Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 240

VAC, 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Ireland and UK)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 230 VAC, 50/

60 Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Europe)

Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug-in AC to AC,

8W, 240 VAC, 50 Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Australia and New

Zealand)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 100 VAC, 50

Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA

A0619627

A0656598

A0619635

A0647042

A0828858

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 387 of 484

Table 51 lists the Nortel IP Phone 2004 package components and product

codes.

Table 51

IP Phone 2004 component list (Part 1 of 2)

IP Phone 2004package contents includes

• IP Phone 2004

• Handset

• Handset cord

• Footstand

• 7 ft. Ethernet cable

• Getting Started card

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Ethergray) with Icon keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Ethergray) with English text label keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal) with Icon keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal) with English text label keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps

NTDU92AA16/

A0533408

NTDU92BA16/

A0533409

NTDU92AA70/

A0533410

NTDU92BA70/

A0533411

NTDU92AB70

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal with Bezel) with Icon keycaps

(RoHS)

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps

Nortel IP Phone 2004 (Charcoal with Bezel) with English text label keycaps (RoHS)

Nortel IP Phone 2004 wall mount kit (Charcoal), used with

Ethergray and Charcoal models

NTDU92AC70E6

NTDU92BB70

NTDU92BC70E6

NTMN15BA70/

A0503076

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 388 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 51

IP Phone 2004 component list (Part 2 of 2)

Replacement parts

7 ft. Ethernet Cat5 cable

Handset (Ethergray)

Handset (Charcoal)

Handset cord (Ethergray)

Handset cord (Charcoal)

Footstand (Charcoal), used for Ethergray and Charcoal models

A0648375

A0788874

A0758634

A0788682

N0000764

A0538587

IP Phone 2004 Power Adaptors

Power transformer (117/120 VAC 50/60 Hz) (North America)

Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 240 VAC,

50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Ireland and UK)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 230 VAC, 50/60

Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Europe)

A0619627

A0656598

A0619635

Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug-in AC to AC, 8W,

240 VAC, 50 Hz, to 16 VAC at 500 mA (Australia and New Zealand)

Power transformer AC to AC, direct plug-in, 8W, 100 VAC, 50 Hz, to

16 VAC at 500 mA

A0647042

A0828858

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 389 of 484

Table 52 lists the Nortel IP Phone 2007 package components and product

codes.

Table 52

Nortel IP Phone 2007 component list (Part 1 of 2)

Nortel IP Phone 2007 package contents includes

• Nortel IP Phone 2007(charcoal with metallic bezel)

• Handset

• Handset cord

• Footstand

• 7 ft. (2.3 m) CAT5 Ethernet cable

• Getting Started card

Replacement parts

7 ft. CAT5 Ethernet cable

Handset (charcoal)

Handset cord (charcoal)

Footstand (charcoal)

Nortel IP Phone 2007 power adapter

Global power adapter

Nortel IP Phone 2007 power cords

Cord 9.9 ft. NA Power, NEMA, 125Vac 13 a

NA, M.East, Taiwan, Indonesia, Philippines, Korea, Thailand,

Vietnam, Japan

Cord 8 ft., ANA Power AS-3, 240Vac 10A

Australia, New Zealand, PRC

Meridian 1 Option 11C Standard European Power Cord 250Vac

Other EMEA, Kenya

Meridian 1 Option 11C Swiss Power Cord, 9.9 ft. 125Vac

Switzerland

NTDU96AB70

A0648375

A0758634

N0000764

A0538587

N0014020

NTTK14AB

NTTK15AA

NTTK16AB

NTTK17AB

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 390 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 52

Nortel IP Phone 2007 component list (Part 2 of 2)

Meridian 1 Option 11C UK Power Cord 240Vac

Hong Kong, Ireland, UK, Singapore, Malaysia, India, Bangladesh,

Pakistan, Brunei, Sri Lanka

Meridian 1 Option 11C Denmark Power Cord Kit, 9.9 ft. 125Vac

Denmark

NTTK18AB

NTTK22AB

Table 53 lists the Nortel IP Phone ACP 2033 package components and

product codes.

Table 53

Nortel IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 components list

IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include:

• IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 (charcoal)

• 7 ft. CAT5 Ethernet cable

• Power Interface Module (PIM) with 25 ft. console cable

• IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card

• Universal power supply

IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include:

• IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 (charcoal)

• 7 ft. CAT5 Ethernet cable

• Power Interface Module (PIM) with 25 ft. console cable

• IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card

• 2 Extension microphones (charcoal)

• Universal power supply

Additional Extension microphones with 7 ft. cable

Power accessory kit (PIM, Universal power supply, cabling)

Nortel IP Phone IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Power cords

NTEX11AA70

NTEX11BA70

NTEX11DA70

NTEX11CA

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 391 of 484

NA NEMA 5-15P, 125V 13A (10ft.)

Euro CEE (7) VII, 250V, 10A (2.5m)

ANZ AS3112, 250V 10A (2.5m)

Swiss SEV 1011, 250V 10A (8ft.)

UK/Ireland BS1363, 240V 10A (8ft.)

Denmark AFSNIT, 250V 10A (2.5m)

Argentina IRAM 2073, 250V 10A (8ft.)

NTTK14AB

NTTK16AB

NTTK15AA

NTTK17AB

NTTK18AB

NTTK22AB

A0814961

Table 54 lists the Package components for the WLAN Handsets.

Table 54

WLAN Handset component list (Part 1 of 4)

WLAN Handset 2210 kit North America

WLAN Handset 2210 kit Global (power supply not included)

North American kit includes:

WLAN 2210 Handset

WLAN Handset 2210 Battery Pack

WLAN Handset 2210 Desktop Charger

WLAN 2210/2211 Charger & Nortel Application Gateway 2246-64

Power Supply for North America

Global kit is the same as the North American kit without the power supply

NTTQ40AA/A0548444

NTTQ40BA/A0548450

NTTQ4010/A0548445

NTTQ4050/A0548446

NTTQ4060/A0548447

NTTQ4101/A0548449

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 392 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 54

WLAN Handset component list (Part 2 of 4)

WLAN Handset 2211 kit North America)

WLAN Handset 2211 kit Global (power supply not included

North American kit includes:

WLAN 2211 Handset

WLAN Handset 2211 Battery Pack

WLAN Handset 2211 Desktop Charger

WLAN 2210/2211 Charger & WLAN Application Gateway 2246-64

Power Supply for North America

Global kit is the same as the North American kit without the power supply

WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger

WLAN Handset 2210 Clothing Clip

WLAN Handset 2211 Clothing Clip

WLAN Handset Headset with noise cancellation

WLAN Handset Headset, over ear

WLAN Handset Headset quick disconnect cord

WLAN Handset 2210/2211 User Guide CD ROM

WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case, black

WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case, (key cover) black

WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case, yellow

WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case, (key cover) yellow

Nortel WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245, a minimum of one

Telephony Manager is required per system order

NTTQ50AA/A0548451

NTTQ50BA/A0548455

NTTQ5010/A0548452

NTTQ5050/A0548453

NTTQ5060/A0548454

NTTQ4101/A0548449

NTTQ5070/A0548039

NTTQ4080/A0548940

NTTQ5101/A0548941

NTTQ5501/A0548946

A0548947

NTTQ5521/A0548948

NTLH21AB/A0548993

NTTQ/5111/A0548942

NTTQ5131/A0548944

NTTQ5121/A0548943

NTTQ5141/A0548945

NTTQ60AA/A048950

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 393 of 484

Table 54

WLAN Handset component list (Part 3 of 4)

WLAN Application Gateway 2246

64 users

128 users

256 users

512 users

1,024 users

10,000+ users

The following items must be ordered with the applicable power supply:

WLAN Handset 2210 Desktop Charger

WLAN Handset 2211 Desktop Charger

WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger

WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 64 users

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 128 users

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 256 users

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 512 users

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 1024 users

WLAN Application Gateway 2246 - 10,000 users

NTTQ65AB/N0023211

NTTQ65BA/A0548971

NTTQ65CA/A0548972

NTTQ65DA/A0548973

NTTQ65EA/A0548974

NTTQ65FA/A0548975

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 394 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 54

WLAN Handset component list (Part 4 of 4)

Power supplies —

WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger:

• North America

• Europe

• UK-HK

• Switzerland

• Australia-New Zealand

• Mexico

WLAN Handset 2210/2211 Charger & WLAN Application Gateway

2246-64:

• North America

• Europe

• UK-HK

• Switzerland

• Australia-New Zealand

• Mexico

WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 & WLAN Application Gateway

2246 (128+ users):

• North America

• Europe

• UK-HK

• Switzerland

• Australia-New Zealand

• Mexico

NTTQ4301/A0548951

NTTQ4311/A0548952

NTTQ4321/A0548953

NTTQ4331/A0548954

NTTQ4341/A0548955

NTTQ4351

NTTQ4101/A0548499

NTTQ4111/A0548956

NTTQ4121/A0548958

NTTQ4131/A0548959

NTTQ4141/A0548960

NTTQ4151

NTTQ4201/A0548961

NTTQ4211/A0548962

NTTQ4221/A0548964

NTTQ4231/A0548966

NTTQ4241/A0548967

NTTQ4251

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 395 of 484

Connectivity and power requirements

Each Nortel IP Phone requires:

• a dedicated 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface

• a small desktop hub or switch if sharing an existing desktop Ethernet connection with a PC.

• a local power supply appropriate for the voltage in the area or a Power over LAN unit. (The Nortel IP Phone 2002 comes with a built-in 3-port switch and is ready for LAN powering.)

Installation and configuration procedures

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 88: "Configuring virtual superloops" on page 396

•

Procedure 89: "Configuring the IP Phones" on page 397

•

Procedure 90: "Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary

IP Telephone Installer" on page 403

•

Procedure 91: "Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components" on page 406

•

Procedure 92: "Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration" on page 411

•

Procedure 93: "Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full

DHCP parameters" on page 414

•

Procedure 94: "Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters" on page 416

•

Procedure 95: "Using Set-Based Installation" on page 419

•

Procedure 96: "Configuring the IP Softphone 2050" on page 422

•

Procedure 97: "Installing the USB Headset Kit" on page 423

•

Procedure 98: "Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC" on page 423

•

Procedure 99: "Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager" on page 425

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 396 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

VoIP bandwidth management zones

VoIP bandwidth management zones can be configured with Element

Manager or using the CLI.

For more information about configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones, see Converging the Data Network with VoIP (NN43001-260). For more information about Element Manager, see Element Manager: System

Administration (NN43001-632).

Configuring virtual superloops

Follow Procedure 88 to configure the virtual superloops. For more details on

virtual superloops, see IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500).

Procedure 88

Configuring virtual superloops

1

Access LD 97. Enter the command:

LD 97

2

Enter responses shown in Table 55.

Table 55

LD 97 – Configure a Virtual Superloop.

Prompt Response Comment

REQ

TYPE

SUPL

CHG

SUPL

Vxxx

Change existing data

Superloop

V stands for a virtual superloop and xxx is the number of the virtual superloop.

xxx = 0-252 in multiples of four for Media Gateways

3

Exit from LD 97. Enter the command:

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 397 of 484

****

End of Procedure

Configuring a Nortel IP Phone using LD 11

Follow Procedure 89 to configure a Nortel IP Phone. The configuration can

be completed using the CLI.

Procedure 89

Configuring the IP Phones

1

Access LD 11. Enter the command:

LD 11

2

Enter the appropriate responses shown in Table 56.

Table 56

LD 11 – Configure a Nortel IP Phone (Part 1 of 5)

Prompt Response Description

REQ:

TYPE:

NEW CHG

1110

1120E

1140E

1150E

2001

2002

2004

2007

2033 i2050

Add new or change existing data

For Nortel IP Phone 1110, Nortel IP Phone 1120E,

Nortel IP Phone 1140E, Nortel IP Phone 1150E, Nortel

IP Phone 2001, Nortel IP Phone 2002, Nortel IP Phone

2004, Nortel IP Phone 2007, Nortel IP Audio Conference

Phone 2033, ,Nortel IP Softphone 2050.

TN l s c u

Terminal Number

Format for CS 1000E, where: l = 0, 4, 8, - 252: superloop number in multiples of 4 s = 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop c = 1-4, 7-10

u = 0-31, (see Table 66 on page 458

)

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 398 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 56

LD 11 – Configure a Nortel IP Phone (Part 2 of 5)

Prompt Response Description

DES

CUST

ZONE

CLS

KEY d...d

xx

0-255

ADD

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

Customer number as defined in LD 15

Zone number to which this Nortel IP Phone belongs

Class of Service

ADD - Automatic Digit Display, (default for Nortel IP

Phone)

For a complete list of responses, refer to Software Input/

Output: Administration (NN43001-611).

xx aaa yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Telephone function key assignments

The following key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone. Note that KEY is prompted until just a carriage return <CR> is entered.

xx = key number aaa = key name or function yyyy = additional information required for the key zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The cccc or D entry deals specifically with the Calling

Line identification feature. Where: cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1.

D = the character “D”. When the character “D” is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key will then be used.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 399 of 484

Table 56

LD 11 – Configure a Nortel IP Phone (Part 3 of 5)

Prompt Response Description

Note: The position of the (cccc or D) field varies depending on the key name or function.

You may enter a CLID table entry if aaa = ACD, HOT d,

HOT L, MCN, MCR, PVN, PVR, SCN or SCR.

Type xx NUL to remove a key function or feature.

Some data ports require specific key assignments. Refer to the Meridian Data Services NTPs for information regarding these requirements.

Key number limits that can be assigned are as follows:

0-7 for Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA)

0-5 for M2006

0-7 for M2008

0-59 for M2616, varies with number of add-on modules

0-79 for I2002, varies with value of KEM

0-79 for I2004, varies with value of KEM

Note: The first Nortel IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 32-55, and the second Nortel IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 56-79.

Type xx = NUL to remove a key function or feature for i2002 and i2004.

If either the Meridian Programmable Data Adapter

(MPDA) or the Display Module is equipped, then key 7 on sets M2008, M2216, and M2616 sets and key 5 on set M2006 will become Program keys which cannot be used as function keys.

Any printout of the TN block will not show key 7 because it is a local function key.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 400 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Table 56

LD 11 – Configure a Nortel IP Phone (Part 4 of 5)

Prompt Response Description

On the M2616, if CLS = HFA, key 15 on the voice TN defaults to the Handsfree key. No other feature assignment is accepted.

Primary and secondary data DNs must be unique.

A station SCR, SCN, MCR, or MCN DN must be removed as a member from all Group Hunt lists before the DN can be modified.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 401 of 484

Table 56

LD 11 – Configure a Nortel IP Phone (Part 5 of 5)

Prompt Response Description

On the M3903, keys 4-15 are blocked. No feature assignment is accepted for keys 2-15.

On the M3903, M3904, and M3905, keys 29-31 are reserved. No feature assignment is accepted for keys

29-31 other than NUL.

On M3904, no feature assignment is accepted for keys

12-15.

On M3905, the technician can assign NUL or a server application on key 5. On key 6, the craftsperson can assign NUL or a local application.

On M3905, the technician can assign NUL or the program key on key 7.

On M3905, the technician can assign AAG, AMG,

ASP,DWC, EMR, MSB, or NRD on keys 8-11. Other features are blocked.

For Nortel IP Phones: xx = Keys 0-5 (and 6-11 using Shift key). These are self-labeled physical keys that can be programmed with any feature.

Note 1:

The Nortel IP Phone 2002 does not have a Shift key. Only keys 0-3 can be programmed.

Note 2:

Keys 16-26 are reserved for dedicated Nortel IP

Phone soft keys.

Table 57 on page 402

lists the dedicated Nortel IP

Phone key name values (aaa). Other key name values can be found in Software Input/Output: Administration

(NN43001-611).

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 402 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

3

Configure the dedicated soft keys, as shown in Table 57.

Table 57

Nortel IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment (Part 1 of 2)

Nortel IP Phone key number

Key 16

Key 17

Key 18

Key 19

Key 20

Key 21

Key 22

Key 23

Key 24

Response(s) Allowed

MWK, NUL

MWK – Message Waiting key

TRN, NUL

TRN – Call Transfer key

A03 or A06, NUL

AO3 – 3-party conference key

AO6 – 6-party conference key

CFW, NUL

CFW – Call Forward key

RGA, NUL

RGA – Ring Again key

PRK, NUL

PRK – Call Park key

RNP, NUL

RNP – Ringing Number pickup key

SCU – Speed Call User

SSU – System Speed Call User

SCC – Speed Call Controller

SSC – System Speed Call Controller

NUL

PRS, NUL

PRS – Privacy Release key

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 403 of 484

Table 57

Nortel IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment (Part 2 of 2)

Nortel IP Phone key number

Key 25

Key 26

Response(s) Allowed

CHG, NUL

CHG – Charge Account key

CPN, NUL

CPN – Calling Party Number key

4

Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each Nortel IP Phone.

End of Procedure

Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone

Installer passwords

Nortel IP Phone Installer Passwords is an optional feature that provides protection against unauthorized modification of the TN on the IP Phones. For detailed information about the Nortel IP Phone Installer Passwords, see

IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation (NN43100-500).

The Nortel IP Phone Installer Passwords are configured on either a Signaling

Server or a Media Card in a node. The passwords then apply to all components in the node.

Procedure 90

Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary

IP Telephone Installer

Note:

This procedure can also be performed from the CLI of a Signaling

Server or Media Card.

1

Log in to Element Manager.

2

Select INetwork > Maintenance and Reports from the navigator.

The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens, as shown in

Figure 2 on page 361 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 404 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Figure 151

General Commands

3

Click the desired node to expand it.

4

Click GEN CMD for the chosen Signaling Server or Media Card.

The General Commands web page opens, as shown in Figure 151.

5

Select NodePwd from the Group drop-down list.

6

Select nodePwdShow from the Command drop-down list.

7

Click RUN.

The current node password information displays in the text area at the bottom of the web page.

8

Select nodePwdSet from the drop-down list.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 152

Node Password

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 405 of 484

9

Enter the administrator Nortel IP Phone Installer Password in the Node

Password box (see Figure 152).

Note:

The entered password appears as asterisks. The valid characters are 0-9 * #. The password can be null or 6 to 14 digits in length.

WARNING

If the administrator password is null (zero length), then the Node ID, TN, and Password screens are not displayed on the IP Phones during their registration process. This provides security as it prevents any entry of passwords or TNs on the IP Phones. However, it is impossible to install new IP Phones (unless a temporary password is set).

10 Select NodePwd from the Group drop-down list.

11 Select nodePwdShow from the Command drop-down list.

12 Click RUN.

The updated administrator Nortel IP Phone Installer Password is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the web page.

13 Enter the temporary Nortel IP Phone Installer Password (see

Figure 153):

a.

Enter the password in the Node Password text box.

b.

Select NodePwd from the Group drop-down list.

c.

Select nodeTempPwdSet from the Command drop-down list.

The area then displays the Uses and Timeout text boxes.

d.

Enter a value for the number of uses or a value for timeout (in hours) or both.

14 Click SET.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 406 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

The temporary password is set.

Figure 153

Node Temp Password

Note 1:

The entered password appears as asterisks. The valid characters are 0-9 * #. The password can be 6 to 14 digits in length.

Note 2:

The temporary password automatically deletes itself after it has been used the defined number of times or when the duration expires, whichever comes first.

15 Select NodePwd from the Group drop-down list.

16 Select the nodePwdShow command from the Command drop-down list.

17 Click RUN.

The updated temporary Nortel IP Phone Installer Password is displayed.

End of Procedure

Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components

Follow Procedure 91 to install Nortel IP Phone hardware components.

Procedure 91

Installing Nortel IP Phone hardware components

For details on installing hardware components, see IP Phones: Description,

Installation, and Operation (NN43001-368).

1

Refer to Figure 154 on page 407

, when installing the following:

a.

Footstand

b.

3-Port Switch only on the Nortel IP Phone 2004, required if a single

Ethernet connection is shared with a PC

c.

Ethernet cable from the set to the 3-Port Switch

d.

Power Transformer or Power Splitter for Power over LAN unit

e.

Handset

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 407 of 484

f.

Handset cord

Figure 154

Nortel IP Phone 2004 components

Power Transformer connection

Power Splitter connection

(power over LAN)

CAT5 line cable

Three Port Switch

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 408 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

2

Connect one end of the CAT5 line cable to the Ethernet jack at the back

of the telephone. See Figure 154 on page 407 .

3

Connect the other end into the IP voice network (Ethernet), using an

RJ-45 connector. See Figure 155 on page 409 .

WARNING

Do not plug the Nortel IP Phone into an ISDN connection. Severe damage can result. Consult the system administrator to ensure that the telephone is being plugged in to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet jack.

4

Power the Nortel IP Phone with one of the following methods:

a.

Using a 16V AC power adaptor, plug the AC power transformer into the nearest power outlet. Check the Nortel IP Phone User Guide for country-specific parameters.

b.

Using a Power over LAN unit, connect the Power over LAN unit as

shown in Figure 155 on page 409 .

5

Secure the telephone footstand to the base of the telephone. Use the angle adjustment grip on the top rear of the telephone to adjust the position.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 409 of 484

Figure 155

Nortel IP Phone connections

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 410 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Configuring the Nortel IP Phone boot parameters

The Nortel IP Phone boot parameters are configured during telephone installation. The following configuration modes are available:

• Manual configuration

— All of the Nortel IP Phone's boot parameters are statically configured at the Nortel IP Phone.

— See Procedure 92: "Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration" on page 411

.

• Partial Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) mode

— Works with standard DHCP server. The DHCP server automatically provides the Nortel IP Phone with an IP address; the remainder of the Nortel IP Phone's boot parameters are statically configured at the

Nortel IP Phone.

— See Procedure 93: "Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters" on page 414 .

• Full DHCP mode

— Requires special configuration of the DHCP server to recognize the

Nortel IP Phone. The DHCP server provides all boot parameters to the Nortel IP Phone, including IP address and server address.

— See Procedure 94: "Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters" on page 416

.

For configuration of the DHCP server, see Converging the Data Network with

VoIP (NN43001-260).

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 411 of 484

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration

Follow Procedure 92 to enter IP Telephone boot parameters using manual

configuration.

Procedure 92

Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration

1

Power the Nortel IP Phone.

Within four seconds, the Nortel logo appears.

2

When the Nortel logo appears on the display, you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence, from left to right.

Note:

If the Nortel logo times out, repeat step 1 and step 2.

3

For the following prompts:

a.

Press the BKSpace (backspace) or Clear keys to change an entry.

b.

Enter new values using the telephone’s keypad.

c.

Press the

OK

key to accept your selection.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DHCP? (0-No, 1-Yes): 0

4

Enter

0

for manual boot parameter configuration.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

SET IP: x.x.x.x

5

Enter the Nortel IP Phone IP address.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

NETMSK: x.x.x.x

6

Enter the subnet mask.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DEF GW: x.x.x.x

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 412 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

7

Enter the default gateway.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 IP: x.x.x.x

8

Enter the Server 1 IP (node IP).

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 PORT: 4100

9

Enter the Server 1 port.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 ACTION: 1

10 Enter the Server 1 action.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 RETRY COUNT: 10

11 Enter the Server 1 retry count.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S2 ...

12 Enter same information as for Server 1.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN?(0-No,1-Ma,2-Au)0

13 Choose one of the following:

a.

Enter

0

to configure no VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

After several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Connect Svc

Node: x

TN: x.x

Go to step 14 on page 413

.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 413 of 484

b.

Enter

1

to configure manual VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN: x

Go to step 14 on page 413

.

c.

Press the OK key.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Invalid TN: x.x

Reason: Unequipped.

Go offhook to do SBI

14 Enter the VLAN ID.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

If you did not configure an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, after several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Node: x

TN: x.x

15 Enter the node number and the Nortel IP Phone's (virtual) TN, then go to

Step 18.

If you configured an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, the Nortel IP

Phone prompts:

Node: x

PassWord: x

16 Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator Nortel IP

Phone Installer Password.

Note 1:

An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered; the actual password is not displayed.

Note 2:

If this screen times out, or if you do not successfully enter the password in three attempts, the Nortel IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt. You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

TN: x.x

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 414 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

17 Enter the Nortel IP Phone’s (virtual) TN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays the logo, the date and time, and the DN keys.

18 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display.

End of Procedure

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters

Follow Procedure 93 to enter IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP

parameters.

Procedure 93

Entering Nortel IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters

1

Power the Nortel IP Phone.

Within four seconds, the Nortel logo appears.

2

When the Nortel logo appears on the display, you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence, from left to right.

Note:

If the Nortel logo times out, repeat step 1 and step 2.

3

For the following prompts:

a.

Press the BKSpace (backspace) or Clear keys to change an entry.

b.

Enter new values using the telephone’s keypad.

c.

Press the OK key to accept your selection.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DHCP? (0-No, 1-Yes): 0

4

Enter

1

to use DHCP.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DHCP:0-Full, 1-Partial:0

5

Enter the 0 to use Full DHCP.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 415 of 484

VLAN?(0-No,1-Ma,2-Au)0

6

Choose one of the following:

a.

Enter

0

to configure no VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

After several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Connect Svc

Node: x

TN: x.x

Go to step 7 on page 415 .

b.

Enter

1

to configure manual VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN: x

Go to step 7.

c.

Enter

2

to configure automatic VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN: x

Go to step 7

7

Enter the VLAN ID.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

If you did not configure an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, after several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Node: x

TN: x.x

8

Enter the node number and the Nortel IP Phone's (virtual) TN, and then

go to step 11 on page 416

.

If you configured an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, the Nortel IP

Phone prompts:

Node: x

PassWord: 0

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 416 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

9

Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator Nortel IP

Phone Installer Password.

Note 1:

An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered; the actual password is not displayed.

Note 2:

If this screen times out, or if you do not successfully enter the password in three attempts, the Nortel IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt. You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

TN: x.x

10 Enter the Nortel IP Phone’s (virtual) TN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays the logo, the date and time, and the DN keys.

11 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display.

End of Procedure

Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters

Follow Procedure 94 to enter IP Telephone boot parameters using partial

DHCP parameters.

Procedure 94

Entering boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters

1

Power up the Nortel IP Phone.

Within four seconds, the Nortel logo appears.

2

When the Nortel logo appears on the display, you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence, from left to right.

Note:

If the Nortel logo times out, repeat step 1 and step 2.

3

For the following prompts:

a.

Press the BKSpace (backspace) or Clear keys to change an entry.

b.

Enter new values using the telephone’s keypad.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 417 of 484

c.

Press the OK key to accept your selection.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DHCP? (0-No, 1-Yes): 0

4

Enter

1

to use DHCP.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

DHCP:0-Full, 1-Partial:0

5

Enter the

1

to use Partial DHCP.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 IP: x.x.x.x

6

Enter the Server 1 IP (node IP).

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 PORT: 4100

7

Enter the Server 1 port.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 ACTION: 1

8

Enter the Server 1 action.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S1 RETRY COUNT: 10

9

Enter the Server 1 retry count.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

S2 ...

10 Enter same information as for Server 1.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN?(0-No,1-Ma,2-Au)0

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 418 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

11 Choose one of the following:

a.

Enter

0

to configure no VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

After several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Connect Svc

Node: x

TN: x.x

Go to step 12.

b.

Enter

1

to configure manual VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN: x

Go to step 12 on page 418

.

c.

Enter

2

to configure automatic VLAN.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

VLAN: x

Go to step 12.

12 Enter the VLAN ID.

The Nortel IP Phone displays:

Locating server...

If you did not configure an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, after several seconds, the Nortel IP Phone prompts:

Node: x

TN: x.x

13 Enter the node number and the Nortel IP Phone's (virtual) TN then go to

step 16.

If you configured a Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, the Nortel IP

Phone prompts:

Node: x

PassWord: 0

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 419 of 484

14 Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator Nortel IP

Phone Installer Password.

Note 1:

An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered; the actual password is not displayed.

Note 2:

If this screen times out, or if you do not successfully enter the password in three attempts, the Nortel IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt. You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

TN: x.x

15 Enter the Nortel IP Phone’s (virtual) TN.

The Nortel IP Phone displays the logo, the date and time, and the DN keys.

16 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display.

End of Procedure

Using Set-Based Installation

Set-Based Installation enables the delegation of telephone installation to trusted users. To have a trusted user perform this function, configure a

temporary Nortel IP Phone Installer Password for the system. See “Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer passwords” on page 403 .

Note: This feature can be an alternative to LD 11 to configure IP Phones on the Call Server.

Follow Procedure 95 to use Set-Based Installation.

Procedure 95

Using Set-Based Installation

This procedure is the same as Procedure 92 on page 411

, Procedure 93 on page 414

, and Procedure 94 on page 416

, except when the system response, displayed on the Nortel IP Phone, is as follows:

If you did not configure an Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, the Nortel IP

Phone prompts:

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 420 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Node: x

TN: x.x

1

Enter the node number and the Nortel IP Phone's (virtual) TN, then go to

Step 4.

If you configured a Nortel IP Phone Installer Password, the Nortel IP

Phone prompts:

Node: x

PassWord: 0

2

Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator Nortel IP

Phone Installer Password.

Note 1:

An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered; the actual password is not displayed.

Note 2:

If this screen times-out, or if you do not successfully enter the password in 3 attempts, the Nortel IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt. You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed.

The Nortel IP Phone prompts:

TN: x.x

3

Enter the Nortel IP Phone’s (virtual) TN.

4

Press the OK key.

The Nortel IP Phone responds Unequipped...

5

Lift the handset. The system accepts the TN.

6

Listen for the continuous dial tone.

The system response, displayed on the Nortel IP Phone, is as follows:

Model ? (20)

7

Press the # key to select the default model, or enter the model number and press #.

8

Listen for a special tone.

The system response, displayed on the Nortel IP Phone, is as follows:

OK, ZONE? (0)

9

Press the # key to select the default zone, or enter the zone number and press #.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 421 of 484

The system response, displayed on the Nortel IP Phone, is as follows:

OK, EXTENSION? 2244

10 Press the # key to select the default DN, or enter a DN and press #.

11 Listen for a relocation tone.

The system response, displayed on the Nortel IP Phone, is as follows:

OK

12 Replace the handset.

The set displays the logo, the date and time, and the DN keys The set based installation is complete.

End of Procedure

Installing the IP Softphone 2050

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 96: "Configuring the IP Softphone 2050" on page 422

•

Procedure 97: "Installing the USB Headset Kit" on page 423

•

Procedure 98: "Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC" on page 423

•

“Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time” on page 424

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 422 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Procedure 96

Configuring the IP Softphone 2050

1

Access LD 11. Enter the command:

LD 11

2

Enter appropriate responses shown in Table 58.

Table 58

LD 11 – Configure the IP Softphone 2050

TYPE:

TN

DES

CUST

...

ZONE

FDN

...

CLS

Prompt Response

REQ: NEW

CHG

I2050pc l s c u x...x

xx

0-255 x...x

aaa

Description

Add new data

Change existing data

Type of data block

Terminal number

ODAS telephone designator

Customer number, as defined in LD 15

Zone number

Flexible CFNA DN

Class of service

HFA - Digital Telephone Handsfree Allowed is default for IP

Softphone 2050 to enable the USB interface

End of Procedure

Installing and configuring on the PC

Installing the USB Headset Kit

Installing the USB Headset Kit application after the IP Softphone 2050 software application enables the IP Softphone 2050 application to show it as an audio device option during the installation. If the USB Headset Kit is

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 423 of 484

installed, you can still choose it as the audio device from the Configuration

Utility.

Procedure 97

Installing the USB Headset Kit

1

Connect the coiled lower cord to the headset cord with the Quick

Disconnect connector. Ensure the Quick Disconnect is securely fastened.

2

Connect the headset cord to the RJ9 jack on the adaptor.

3

Connect the USB cable to the headset adaptor and to one of the USB jacks at the back of your PC or USB hub.

End of Procedure

The first time the headset adapter is plugged in, there is a delay while

Windows

®

configures the device and locates appropriate driver software.

During the installation you can be prompted to supply the original Windows

CD-ROM so that Windows can locate the required drivers.

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 application

Procedure 98

Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC

1

Insert the CD-ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive of your PC.

Note:

Installation should proceed automatically. If it does not, then

continue with step 1. Otherwise go directly to step 5.

2

On the PC desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.

3

Double-click the CD icon.

4

Double-click the Setup icon.

5

Follow the prompts that appear on the screen.

6

Run the IP Softphone 2050 Configuration Utility to assign a server address, select sound devices, and select a server type.

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 424 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time

Installation places the IP Softphone 2050 in the Windows Start menu at Start

> Programs > Nortel > IP Softphone 2050. The Configuration Utility is placed in the Windows Control Panel.

The IP Softphone 2050 application is started by one of the following:

• Select Start > Programs > Nortel > IP Softphone 2050.

• Click the desktop shortcut (if one was created during the installation).

• Automatic start-up sequence.

Note: If you want the IP Softphone 2050 to start automatically when the

PC boots, place a shortcut to the application in the Start-up folder.

When an IP Softphone 2050 starts for the first time and connects to the network, it executes a start-up sequence. The elements of the start-up sequence are as follows:

• Get the IP parameters.

• Find a gateway server, and authenticate the user.

As the IP Softphone 2050 registers with the system, the following occurs:

• If a non-null node password is enabled, it prompts for a node number and password. Enter the node number and password using the keyboard or numeric keypad. After the password is verified, enter the TN of the IP

Softphone 2050. See IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500) for more on the password feature.

• If the null node password is configured and enabled, these screens are skipped and no option is provided to change the password.

• If the node password is disabled or not configured, it prompts for a node number and TN. Enter the node number and TN using the keyboard or numeric keypad.

The IP Softphone 2050 configuration is complete.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

Page 425 of 484

Verifying Nortel IP Phone functionality

You can now use the IP Phones. To test the telephones, make Nortel IP

Phone-to-Nortel IP Phone calls.

Displaying registered IP Phones

Follow Procedure 99 to display the IP Phones registered on a Signaling

Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.

Procedure 99

Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager

1

Log in to Element Manager.

2

Select System > IP Network > Maintenance and Reports from the navigator.

3

Click the desired node to expand it.

4

Click GEN CMD for the desired Signaling Server or Media Card.

a.

Select Iset from the Group Drop Down List box.

b.

If prompted, select the range of sets to display.

c.

Click RUN.

The status of all IP Phones registered on this Signaling Server or Media Card is displayed.

End of Procedure

Upgrading firmware

Refer to the IP Line: Description, Installation, and Operation

(NN43100-500), to check for the latest Nortel IP Phone firmware version and how to upgrade to the latest Nortel IP Phone firmware.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 426 of 484

Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

438

Page 427 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expansion . 430

Cross-connecting telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Connecting a telephone without a PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Connecting an off-premise telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Connecting an attendant console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Introduction

This chapter contains instructions for connecting telephone Line cards located in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander to the MDF cross-connect terminal.

This chapter contains the following procedures:

•

Procedure 100: "Cross-connecting telephones" on page 430

•

Procedure 101: "Connecting a telephone without a PFTU" on page 433

•

Procedure 102: "Connecting an off-premise telephone" on page 434

•

Procedure 103: "Connecting an attendant console" on page 435

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 428 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Before you proceed, install the cable from the slot that contains the Line card

associated with the telephone being connected. Refer to “Installing the Main

Distribution Frame” on page 371

, if you require additional cable installation.

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

Refer to the Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for full descriptions of country-specific IPE cards and their installation procedures

Figure 156 and Figure 157 on page 429 show the circuit card assignments for

the Media Gateway 1000E and Media Gateway Expander. Refer to these figures to make sure that you have all circuit cards inserted in the correct slots.

The Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010) supports IPE circuit cards in slots 1 to

10. Slot 0 is reserved for the Gateway Controller. Slots 22 and 23 are dedicated for Server cards. The MG 1010 does not support or require an

Expander.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Page 429 of 484

Figure 156

Circuit card assignments in a Media Gateway 1000E

Figure 157

Circuit card assignments in a Media Gateway Expander

SLOT

10

SLOT

9

SLOT

8

SLOT

7

Slot 10

Slot 9

Slot 8

Slot 7

553-CSE9032

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 430 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Circuit cards features

If a circuit card has a switch symbol on its faceplate, it is equipped with option switches, strapping plugs, or both. Make sure that the circuit cards with option switches or strapping plugs are set correctly. Some circuit cards can have daughterboards and other add-on devices installed on them.

Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway

Expansion

The work order developed by the planning and engineering department outlines the placement of peripheral cards in the Media Gateway and Media

Gateway Expander slots. See Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for card placement into card slots. The 48-port Digital Line Card is not supported.

Cross-connecting telephones

Connect the telephones according to Figure 158 on page 431

and Figure 159 on page 432 .

Procedure 100

Cross-connecting telephones

1

Locate the telephone terminations at the cross-connect terminal.

2

Connect the Z-type cross-connect wire to the leads of the telephone.

3

Locate line circuit card (TN) terminations at the cross-connect terminal.

4

Connect the other end of the cross-connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Page 431 of 484

Figure 158

NE-500/2500-type telephone cross connections

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

Unit

11

Unit

12

Unit

13

Unit

14

Unit

15

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

7

Unit

8

Unit

9

Unit

10

Cable pairs

Line

Pack

Unit

0

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3

Unit

4

Lead designation

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

Cross connect terminal

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

553-8349.EPS

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 432 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Figure 159

Digital telephone cross connections

Pack connector

PE shelf

Line pack

Unit 0

T0

R0

26

1

Unit 1

T1

R1

27

2

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

Unit 14

Unit 15

T14

R14

T15

R15

40

15

40

16

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Cross connect block

T0

R0

T1

R1

Telephone connecting block, or connector

W

B

G

R

Line cord to telephone

For Power

Supply leads to telephone

T14

R14

T15

R15 to telephone to telephone

Part of

25 pair cable

Shelf connector

Part of 25 pair cable

553-8350.EPS

End of Procedure

Connecting a telephone without a PFTU

See “Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit” on page 439

for connecting telephones with the PFTU.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Page 433 of 484

Procedure 101

Connecting a telephone without a PFTU

1

Locate the telephone terminations on the cross-connect terminal.

2

Connect one end of the cross-connect wire to the leads of the telephone.

3

Locate the Line card terminations on the cross-connect terminal.

4

Connect the other end of the cross-connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block.

5

Activate the telephone.

End of Procedure

Connecting an off-premise telephone

Connect off-premise analog (500/2500-type) telephones through an NT1R20

Off-premise Line card or NTAK92AA Off-Premise Protection Module. Each

NTAK92AA module can connect up to four analog (500/2500-type) telephones and can interface with the NT8D09 Message Waiting Line card.

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The message-waiting Line card produces -150 volts, which is considered hazardous on off-premise telephones. Make sure that the -150 volts are disabled on off-premise telephones.

The voltage is disabled when the telephone’s Class of

Service (CLS) is Message Waiting Lamp Denied (LPD) and Message Waiting Denied (MWD) in LD 10.

Refer to the Software Input/Output: Administration

(NN43001-611) for information about LD 10.

Do not assign a Class of Service of LPA or MWA to an off-premise telephone.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 434 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Procedure 102

Connecting an off-premise telephone

1

Install the NTAK92BA Off-Premise Protection Module on the wall using four #10 1/2-in (minimum) screws.

2

Connect a #6 AWG from the grounding lug at the bottom of the

NTAK92AA Off-Premise Protection Module to the system ground. Refer

to Figure 160 on page 435 .

DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

If connecting to a message-waiting Line card, unseat the card from its assigned slot before continuing with the next step.

3

Connect two NTAK9204 cables (one from connector J1 and one from connector J2) from the protection module to the cross-connect terminal.

4

Terminate the cables as shown in Figure 158 on page 431

.

5

Cross-connect the J1 cable to the Tip and Ring connections coming from the Line card.

6

Cross-connect the J2 cable to the off-premise telephone.

7

Install the regulatory label provided with the Off-Premise Protection

Module on the inside right-hand wall of the Media Gateway.

8

Install the Line card in its assigned position.

9

Activate the telephone.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Page 435 of 484

Figure 160

NTAK92BA Off-Premise Protection Module connections

J2

Cross-connect terminal block

BL - 1W

BL - 2W

O - 1W

O - 2W

G - 1W

G - 2W

BR - 1W

BR - 2W

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

To off-premise telephones

NTAK92AA

Off-Premise

Protection

Module

Ground lug

J1

BL - 1W

BL - 2W

O - 1W

O - 2W

G - 1W

G - 2W

BR - 1W

BR - 2W

T1

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

T4

R4

To analogue line card in

Option 11 cabinet

Connector J2 Connector J1

NTAK9204

Cable

NTAK9204

Cable

553-8351.EPS

End of Procedure

Connecting an attendant console

Procedure 103

Connecting an attendant console

1

Locate the attendant console terminations at the cross-connect terminal.

2

Locate the Line card terminations at the cross-connect terminal.

3

With cross-connect wire, connect the Line card and other connections to

the console, as shown in Figure 161 on page 436 .

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 436 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Figure 161

Attendant console connections

To 1st TN

To 2nd TN

Cross-connect block

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

Console connector

26

1

27

2

Console power from AUX cable

(one console only)

To +15 AUX

(W-G 1 dot wire) on AUX cable

To -15 AUX

(G-W 1 dot wire) on AUX cable

Note: As an alternative, console power can be obtained from the

4 th and 5 th TNs on the circuit card.

To 3rd TN

ASM/

ADN

W-S

S-W

+ AUX

- AUX

GND

TC

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

30

5

32

7

33

8

36

11

Cable to

M2250

Console

To 4th TN Tip

To 4th TN Ring

To 5 th TN Tip

To 5 th TN Ring

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

+VPS

+VPS RTN

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

V-S

S-V

41

16

42

17

Relay 2

Relay 1

50

25

Cable from console to cross-connect terminal

Note 1:

The M2250 is powered using the line circuits and if required from the AUX cable. In addition to the primary TN, secondary TN and ASMTN, two TNs are for power from the AUX cable are cabled to the M2250 through the + AUX and - AUX leads. Maximum loop length is 3000 ft (915 m) of 24 AWG

(5.0 Metric Wire Gauge).

Note 2:

When additional options are used (BLF), an additional 16V DC power supply is required. The 16V DC source is cabled through +VPS and +VPS RTN leads. The maximum distance from the console to the power source is 120 ft (36 m) of 24 AWG (5.0 Metric Wire Gauge) wire.

553-8352.EPS

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

Page 437 of 484

Table 59

Color combinations of cable pairs

Color

Unit

W-Bl

Bl-W

0

W-O

O-W

1

W-G

G-W

2

Color

Unit

R-BR

BR-R

8

R-S

S-R

9

BK-BL

BL-BK

10

W-BR

BR-W

3

BK-O

O-BK

11

W-S

S-W

4

BK-G

G-BK

12

R-BL

BL-R

5

BK-BR

BR-BK

12

R-O

O-R

6

BK-S

S-BK

14

R-G

G-R

7

Y-B

B-Y

15

End of Procedure

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 438 of 484

Installing Line cards and cross-connecting telephones

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

452

Installing and cross-connecting a

Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 439 of 484

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Installing and connecting a third-party PFTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a PFTU. . . . . . . . 446

Connecting a trunk to a PFTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Introduction

Power fail transfer occurs when the main power to the CS 1000E system is cut off. When a power interruption occurs, the Power Fail Transfer Unit

(PFTU) connects predetermined analog (500/2500-type) telephones directly to the Central Office trunks. A PFTU is capable of supporting a maximum of five or eight telephones (depending on the PFTU type).

A PFTU can be connected to the AUX connector on a Media Gateway.

IMPORTANT!

A PFTU does not support Digital trunks. Use Analog trunks if power failure backup is required.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 440 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

The following procedures are provided in this chapter:

1

Procedure 104: "Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU" on page 440

2

Procedure 105: "Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a

PFTU" on page 448

3

Procedure 106: "Connecting a Trunk to a PFTU" on page 450

Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU

Follow Procedure 104 to install and connect a QUA6 PFTU. Refer to the

equipment layout plan for the location of the PFTU.

Note: The QUA6 PFTU operates with loop-start and ground-start

Central Office trunks. With ground start trunks, the associated telephone set must have a ground start button.

Procedure 104

Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU

1

Install the PFTU on the wall near the system cross-connect terminal.

Fasten the PFTU in position with four screws.

2

Install an NE-A25B-type 25-pair cable from connector J1 on the faceplate of the PFTU to its assigned location at the cross-connect terminal.

3

Label the pairs of the J1 cable on the cross-connect terminal block as

shown in Figure 162 on page 440 .

Figure 162

J1 cable labels

Pairs

1 to 4

Pairs

1 to 4

Pairs

1 to 4

Pairs

1 to 4

Pairs

1 to 4

Control PFT1 PFT2 PFT3 PFT4

Pairs

1 to 4 1 Pair

PFT5

PFT1

Power

Label the pairs on the terminal block as shown. If using

BIX blocks, attach the appropriate designation strip.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 441 of 484

4

Connect the PFTU power and control connections to the AUX connector

on the Media Gateway. See Figure 163 on page 441

, Table 61 on page 443

, Table 60 on page 442

and Figure 165 on page 444 . The

Meridian 1 Option 11C AUX connector is shown in Figure 164 on page 442 .

Figure 163

AUX cable connector on Media Gateway

AUX

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 442 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Figure 164

AUX cable connector on Meridian 1 Option 11C

AUX

AUX

Table 60 (Part 1 of 2)

NTAK1104E6 AUX cable termination information

Color

W-BL

BL-W

O-W

Wire number

1

2

3

Designation

BRTN

BRTN

-48V AUX (250mA)

Connection

to QUA6-J1 1R to QUA6-J1 2R to QUA6-J1 25T,

25R

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 443 of 484

Table 60 (Part 2 of 2)

NTAK1104E6 AUX cable termination information

W-O

G-W

W-G

4

5

6

PFTS

Not used

Not used to QUA6-J1 2T

Not used

Not used

Table 61

Control and power connections on cable J1

Function

Control

PFTU power

Pair Number

1T

1R

2T

2R

3T

3R

4T

4R

25T

25R

J1 Cable from QUA6

Pair Color

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

S-V

V-S

Connects to

(ALM)

BRTN

PFTS

BRTN

(TC)

-48 V

-48 V

Cross-connects to

Not used

W-BL connection on AUX cable

W-O connection on AUX cable. Transfer begins by applying ground to this lead.

BL-W connection on AUX cable.

Console transfer switch. See console connections.

Transfer begins by applying ground to this lead.

Not used

Not used

Not used

O-W connection on AUX cable. Maximum 250 mA draw on O-W lead.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 444 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Figure 165

Power fail transfer

End of Procedure

Installing and connecting a third-party PFTU

Follow the equipment manufacturer’s instructions for installing the PFTU.

Use the information in Table 62 to connect a third-party PFTU.

Table 62

PFTU control lead signals

Lead State

NTAK1104 AUX cable lead

BRTN

BRTN

When PFTU is in non-transferred state

GROUND

GROUND

When PFTU is in transferred state

GROUND

GROUND

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 445 of 484

Table 62

PFTU control lead signals

Lead State

NTAK1104 AUX cable lead

-48V AUX

PFTS

When PFTU is in non-transferred state

-48V DC (250 mA max.)

OPEN

When PFTU is in transferred state

-48V DC (250 mA max.)

GROUND

Note 1: Refer to Figure 163 on page 441 and

Table 63 on page 445

for

Auxiliary cable connections to the CS 1000E system.

Note 2: If power is removed from the QUA6, a transfer of the PFTU can occur.

Table 63

NTAK1104E6 AUX cable termination information

Color

W-BL

BL-W

O-W

W-O

G-W

W-G

Wire number

1

2

3

4

5

6

Designation

BRTN

BRTN

-48V AUX (250mA)

PFTS

Not used

Not used

Connection

to QUA6-J1 1R to QUA6-J1 2R to QUA6-J1 25T,

25R to QUA6-J1 2T

Not used

Not used

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 446 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a PFTU

Ensure that the cable from the appropriate Line card slot has been connected

to the telephone. Refer to “Installing the Main Distribution Frame” on page 371

.

Follow Procedure 105 to connect an analog telephone to a PFTU. Refer to the

equipment layout plan to determine where to locate the PFTU.

DANGER

Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations.

Never touch un-insulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 447 of 484

Figure 166

Analog Line card cable distribution

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-G

G-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

Cable pairs

Line

Pack

Unit

0

Unit

1

Unit

2

Unit

3

Unit

4

Unit

5

Unit

6

Unit

11

Unit

12

Unit

13

Unit

14

Unit

7

Unit

8

Unit

9

Unit

10

Unit

15

Lead designation

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

Cross connect terminal

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

To 500/2500-type telephone

553-8349.EPS

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 448 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Procedure 105

Connecting an analog (500/2500-type) telephone to a PFTU

1

Locate the telephone terminations on the cross-connect terminal.

2

Connect one end of the cross-connect wire to the leads of the telephone.

3

Locate the PFTU connections (unit PFTU 1 through PFTU 5) assigned to

this telephone at the cross-connect terminal. See Table 64 on page 448 .

4

Connect the other end of the cross-connect wire to the pair assigned to the telephone on the PFTU.

5

Connect a second cross-connect wire to the pair assigned to the Line card on the PFTU.

6

Locate the Line card terminations on the cross-connect terminal.

7

Connect the other end of the cross-connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block.

Table 64

Power Fail Transfer Unit connections (Part 1 of 3)

QUA6 J1 Cable

Function

PFT 1

Pair

5T

5R

6T

6R

7T

7R

8T

8R

Color

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

Connects to:

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central Office Trunk

Trunk Line card

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 449 of 484

Table 64

Power Fail Transfer Unit connections (Part 2 of 3)

Function

PFT 2

PFT 3

PFT 4

QUA6 J1 Cable

Color

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

Pair

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

9T

9R

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

17T

17R

18T

18R

19T

19R

20T

20R

Connects to:

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central Office Trunk

Trunk Line card

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central Office Trunk

Trunk Line card

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central Office Trunk

Trunk Line card

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 450 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Table 64

Power Fail Transfer Unit connections (Part 3 of 3)

Function

PFT 5

Pair

21T

21R

22T

22R

23T

23R

24T

24R

QUA6 J1 Cable

Color

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

Connects to:

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central Office Trunk

Trunk Line card

End of Procedure

Connecting a trunk to a PFTU

Follow Procedure 106 to connect a Trunk to a PFTU.

Procedure 106

Connecting a Trunk to a PFTU

1

Locate the PFTU terminal blocks at the cross-connect terminal.

2

Cross-connect the first pair of the assigned PFTU to the telephone.

See Table 65 on page 451

for PFTU connections.

3

Cross-connect the second pair of the PFTU to the TN assigned to the telephone.

4

Cross-connect the third pair of the PFTU to the Central Office trunk.

5

Cross-connect the third pair of the PFTU to the TN assigned to the trunk.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Page 451 of 484

6

Repeat for each trunk assigned to the PFTU.

Table 65

Power Fail Transfer Unit connections (Part 1 of 2)

Function

QUA6 J1 cable

Connects to:

Telephone

Connects to:

—

P

F

T

1

P

F

T

2

P

F

T

3

Pair

9T

9R

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

7T

7R

8T

8R

5T

5R

6T

6R

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

Color

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Telephone Line card

Central office trunk

Trunk Line card

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central office trunk

Trunk Line card

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central office trunk

Trunk Line card

TN assigned to the telephone

—

TN assigned to the Trunk

—

TN assigned to the telephone

—

TN assigned to the Trunk

—

TN assigned to the telephone

—

TN assigned to the Trunk

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 452 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit

Table 65

Power Fail Transfer Unit connections (Part 2 of 2)

QUA6 J1 cable

Function

P

F

T

4

P

F

T

5

Pair

20T

20R

21T

21R

22T

22R

23T

23R

24T

24R

17T

17R

18T

18R

19T

19R

Color

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Connects to:

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central office trunk

Trunk Line card

Telephone

Telephone Line card

Central office trunk

Trunk Line card

Connects to:

—

TN assigned to the telephone

—

TN assigned to the Trunk

—

TN assigned to the telephone

—

TN assigned to the Trunk

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

458

Page 453 of 484

Basic system telephony configuration

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Basic system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

TN assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Introduction

This chapter shows overlay (LD) sequences required to configure the system with basic telephony features. Your Planning and Engineering group provides the details needed to configure basic telephony.

Note: The Command Line Interface (CLI) must be used for some configuration (for example, LD 10 and LD 11) before Element Manager can be used to further configure basic telephony.

This chapter contains Procedure 107: "Configuring the basic system" on page 454

.

Basic system configuration

Programming the CS 1000E system requires loading different overlay programs and using each one to enter a specific type of information.

See Software Input/Output: Administration (NN43001-611) for information about overlays.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 454 of 484

Basic system telephony configuration

Flow charts

Figure 167 on page 455

shows the programming overlay (LD) sequence for a new system. The Data-entry-sequence flowchart does not show all possible administration overlays.

In some cases, you must move back and forth between overlays to complete the programming. For example, you must program the Customer Data Block

(CDB) before you program the attendant console. However, there are console-related prompts in the CDB that cannot be programmed until you have programmed an attendant console. Skip the console-related prompts, complete the CDB programming, then return to the CDB after the console is programmed. Finish the CDB console-related prompts. A similar situation exists with the Speed Call lists and the Telephones. You must activate the

Speed Call list(s) before you can assign the list(s) to a telephone.

Figure 168 on page 456

, and Figure 169 on page 457 show overlay titles and

gate openers for each feature group. A gate opener enables users to program a related group of features without stepping through all prompts of an overlay.

NTP references are shown in the flowchart shaded boxes for those features and options beyond the scope of this guide.

Procedure 107

Configuring the basic system

Use the overlays to configure basic system features offered by the CS 1000E.

1

Complete the configuration using the overlays in the order shown in

Figure 167 on page 455

, Figure 168 on page 456

, and Figure 169 on page 457 .

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Basic system telephony configuration

Page 455 of 484

Figure 167

Data-entry-sequence for new systems

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 456 of 484

Basic system telephony configuration

Figure 168

Configuration Record

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Figure 169

Customer Data Block

Basic system telephony configuration

Page 457 of 484

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 458 of 484

Basic system telephony configuration

TN assignment

Table 66 shows the TN assignments for the MG 1000E.

Table 66

TN assignments for MG 1000E

Slots 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10

TN

MG 1000E

1

4

5

2

3

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

...

...

127

128

l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c l s c

000 0 01 000 0 02 000 0 03 000 0 04 000 0 07 000 0 08 000 0 09 000 0 10

000 1 01 000 1 02 000 1 03 000 1 04 000 1 07 000 1 08 000 1 09 000 1 10

004 0 01 004 0 02 004 0 03 004 0 04 004 0 07 004 0 08 004 0 09 004 0 10

004 1 01 004 1 02 004 1 03 004 1 04 004 1 07 004 1 08 004 1 09 004 1 10

008 0 01 008 0 02 008 0 03 008 0 04 008 0 07 008 0 08 008 0 09 008 0 10

008 1 01 008 1 02 008 1 03 008 1 04 008 1 07 008 1 08 008 1 09 008 1 10

012 0 01 012 0 02 012 0 03 012 0 04 012 0 07 012 0 08 012 0 09 012 0 10

012 1 01 012 1 02 012 1 03 012 1 04 012 1 07 012 1 08 012 1 09 012 1 10

016 0 01 016 0 02 016 0 03 016 0 04 016 0 07 016 0 08 016 0 09 016 0 10

016 1 01 016 1 02 016 1 03 016 1 04 016 1 07 016 1 08 016 1 09 016 1 10

020 0 01 020 0 02 020 0 03 020 0 04 020 0 07 020 0 08 020 0 09 020 0 10

020 1 01 020 1 02 020 1 03 020 1 04 020 1 07 020 1 08 020 1 09 020 1 10

024 0 01 024 0 02 024 0 03 024 0 04 024 0 07 024 0 08 024 0 09 024 0 10

024 1 01 024 1 02 024 1 03 024 1 04 024 1 07 024 1 08 024 1 09 024 1 10

252 0 01 252 0 02 252 0 03 252 0 04 252 0 07 252 0 08 252 0 09 252 0 10

252 1 01 252 1 02 252 1 03 252 1 04 252 1 07 252 1 08 252 1 09 252 1 10

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

464

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Page 459 of 484

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15. . . . . . . . . . 460

Installing an alarm through QUA6 PFTU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Introduction

This chapter describes the procedures for connecting an external alarm to the

CS 1000E system.

This chapter contains the following procedure: Procedure 108: "Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15" on page 460

The following are the two methods of connecting an external alarm to the

CS 1000E system:

• through an alarm port assigned in software

• through contacts in a QUA6 Power Failure Transfer Unit (PFTU)

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 460 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15

The system can be equipped with an alarm port that is assigned in software.

Connect an analog line to an analog (500/250-type) telephone or another similar type of ringing or alerting device.

Follow Procedure 108 to install an alarm using an alarm port assigned in

LD 15.

Procedure 108

Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15

1

Install an analog (500/2500-type) line as described in “Installing and configuring Nortel IP Phones” on page 381

.

2

Connect an analog (500/2500-type) telephone, or another similar alerting device used as an alarm, to the line.

3

Use LD 15 to assign an alarm port, (see Table 67).

Note:

If the DN assigned to the alarm is accidentally called, the alarm activates. To avoid false alarms, make sure the DN is not already assigned.

Table 67

LD 15 – Assign an alarm port.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

...

ALDN

Response

CHG

CDB xx x...x

Comment

Change existing data

Customer Data Block

Customer Number as defined in LD 15

Alarm Directory Number

End of Procedure

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Page 461 of 484

Installing an alarm through QUA6 PFTU connections

A QUA6 PFTU can be used to connect an external alarm through normally open or normally closed contacts of one of its units. The contacts operate under the same conditions as the PFTU and can support the capacities listed

in Table 68.

Table 68

The AC capacities

Maximum

Switching power

Switching voltage

Switching current

AC capacities

50.0 V A

125.0 V rms

0.5 A

Figure 170 on page 462 is an example of the contacts on one unit (PFT1) of

the PFTU. The figure also shows the contacts in normal operating mode, not

in failure mode. Table 69 on page 462

provides the connections for all units on the PFTU.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 462 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Figure 170

Contacts in PFTU

PFT 1 on PFTU

8T (R-G)

Normally connected to a

CO trunk

7T (R-O)

8R (G-R)

Normally connected to a trunk line card

7R (O-R)

Normally connected to a telephone

5T (W-S)

6T (R-BL)

6R (BL-R)

Normally connected to a telephone line card

5R (S-W)

Table 69

PFTU connections (Part 1 of 3)

Unit

P

F

T

1

Pair

5T

5R

6T

6R

7T

7R

8T

8R

Color

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-G

G-R

Normal mode Failure mode

Makes with 6T and 6R Opens 6T and 6R

Makes with 7T and 7R

Makes with 5T and 5R Open

Makes with 8T and 8R Opens 8T and 8R

Makes with 5T and 5R

Makes with 7T and 7R Open

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Page 463 of 484

Table 69

PFTU connections (Part 2 of 3)

Unit

P

F

T

2

P

F

T

3

P

F

T

4

Pair

13T

13R

14T

14R

15T

15R

16T

16R

9T

9R

10T

10R

11T

11R

12T

12R

17T

17R

18T

18R

19T

19R

20T

20R

Color

BK-G

G-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

Y-O

O-Y

Y-G

G-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

Normal mode

Makes with 10T and

10R

Failure mode

Opens 10T and 10R

Makes with 11T and 11R

Makes with 9T and 9R Open

Makes with 12T and

12R

Makes with 11T and

11R

Makes with 14T and

14R

Makes with 13T and

13R

Makes with 16T and

16R

Makes with 15T and

15R

Makes with 18T and

18R

Makes with 17T and

17R

Makes with 20T and

20R

Makes with 19T and

19R

Opens 12T and 12R

Makes with 9T and 9R

Open

Opens 14T and 14R

Makes with 15T and 15R

Open

Opens 16T and 16R

Makes with 13T and 13R

Open

Opens 18T and 18R

Makes with 19T and 19R

Open

Opens 20T and 20R

Makes with 17T and 17R

Open

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 464 of 484

Installing and cross-connecting an external alarm from a PFTU

Table 69

PFTU connections (Part 3 of 3)

Unit

P

F

T

5

Pair

21T

21R

22T

22R

23T

23R

24T

24R

Color

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-G

G-V

V-BR

BR-V

Normal mode

Makes with 22T and

22R

Makes with 21T and

21R

Makes with 24T and

24R

Makes with 23T and

23R

Failure mode

Opens 22T and 22R

Makes with 23T and 23R

Open

Opens 24T and 24R

Makes with 21T and 21R

Open

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

468

Page 465 of 484

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database

Contents

This section contains information on the following topics:

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Implementation summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Introduction

This chapter provides an outline for configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database.

Use the IP Peer Networking: Installation and Commissioning

(NN43001-313) NTP to configure IP Peer Networking and for instructions about managing the Gatekeeper database.

Implementation summary

Note: This section is intended as a summary of how to implement

IP Peer Networking and how to manage the Gatekeeper database. Many of these steps can be performed out of sequence.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 466 of 484

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database

You must configure the following data when setting up a CS 1000E

IP network:

1

Configure the Virtual Trunk routes using Element Manager or the

Command Line Interface (LD 16). Configure the Route Data Blocks and associate the Virtual Trunk routes with the IP network by configuring the following parameters:

a

route information

b

network management information

(for example, Access Restrictions)

c

bandwidth zone

d

Signaling Server host name for the route

e

protocol identifier

f

associated Node ID

2

Configure the Virtual Trunks using Element Manager or the Command

Line Interface (LD 14).

3

Configure the network routing within the CS 1000E.

a

Use existing tools to configure networking features, such as routing calls based on digits dialed.

b

Configure dialing plan information for calls that must be routed to circuit-switched trunks (for example, PSTN interfaces). You can route these calls using a feature such as Network Alternate Route

Selection (NARS). Configure Virtual Trunk routes in NARS the same way as traditional trunks.

4

Configure the Primary, Alternate, and Failsafe Gatekeepers at installation and initial setup.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database

Page 467 of 484

5

Configure the Gatekeeper database to provide a central database of addresses that are required to route calls across the network, using the

Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager.

a

Log in to the Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager.

b

Verify that the Gatekeeper is the Primary Gatekeeper and is active.

c

Configure the System Wide Settings.

d

Create the CDP domains.

e

Add the RAS and non-RAS endpoints.

f

Add the endpoint prefixes.

g

Add the Numbering Plan entries for each endpoint, including the

Cost Factor for each entry.

h

Add the default routes.

i

Add the Gatekeeper zones (if required).

j

Test the Numbering Plans.

k

Perform database cutover.

l

Perform the following operations, as necessary:

i.

Take the Gatekeeper out-of-service.

ii.

Perform database cutover.

iii. Perform database rollback.

iv. View traffic reports.

m

Log out of the Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 468 of 484

Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

484

Page 469 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Although Nortel recommends using direct connections from the faceplate

Ethernet connectors of the Gateway Controller and Server cards to a Layer 2 switch, they also support the cabling configurations shown in this appendix

IMPORTANT!

If your cabinet or chassis does not require specific Nortel supplied cables for Server cards, you must use shielded twisted pair Ethernet cables for the faceplate ELAN and

TLAN connections.

The Gateway Controller can use the features of the Media Gateway by using two short cables to connect from the card faceplate ethernet connectors to the two front bulkhead ethernet connectors that are internally wired to the

100BaseT ethernet connectors on the rear of the Media Gateway. In addition the Gateway Controller backplane connector provides both an ELAN and

TLAN connection to the 10/100BaseT ethernet connectors on the rear of the

Media Gateway. Figure 171 on page 471 shows both options.

Connecting to the 1E and 2T ethernet connectors cause the 10/100BaseT leds to function on the rear of the Media Gateway.

If the NTDW67 MGC Reference ROHS cable is used the LED on the back of the Media Gateway will not function. Only the faceplate LEDs will function.

The MGC card CE and CT faceplate ethernet ports can be used as local

Ethernet maintenance ports.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 470 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

In a Media Gateway 1010 (MG 1010), the Gateway Controller backplane

Ethernet connections are provided by the Media Gateway Utility (MGU) faceplate ELAN and TLAN ports.

CS 1000E dual-homing is supported in accordance with the following cabinets and chassis:

Table 70

Supported Cabinets and Media Gateway

Product

Number

NTDU14

NTDU15

NTDK91

NTDK92

NTAK11

NTC310

Product Name Vintage

Media Gateway

Chassis

Media Gateway

Expansion

Chassis

Chassis System

Main Chassis

Chassis System

Chassis

Expander

BB

Main/Expansion

Cabinet

Media Gateway

1010

BD

AAE6

AA

CA

DA, DAE5

AA

DA

DAE5

BBE5

Release 7.0

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Dual Homing

Supported

No

Yes

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

No

N/A

Yes

Yes

The following figures show supported cabling options. The MGC card is shown, but the Gateway Controller can also be an CP MG card.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 471 of 484

Figure 171

MGC cabling in a Media Gateway

Gateway Controller back Ethernet connections are MGU faceplate ports in a

MG 1010.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 472 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 172 on page 472 demonstrates the MGC cabling in a dual-homed

configuration.

Figure 172

MGC Dual-homed in a Media Gateway

Gateway Controller back Ethernet connections are MGU faceplate ports in a

MG 1010.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 473 of 484

Figure 173 on page 473 shows the MGC cabling from the backplane

connector to the MGC 100BT connector Cabinet.

Figure 173

MGC using MGC 100BT in a Cabinet

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 474 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 174 on page 474 shows the MGC in a dual-homed configuration in a

Cabinet.

Figure 174

MGC Dual-homed in a Cabinet

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 475 of 484

Figure 175 on page 475

shows the MGC and CP PM card as a SA Call Server in a Media Gateway.

Figure 175

SA Call Server in a Media Gateway

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 476 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 176 on page 476 shows the MGC and CP PM as a SA Call Server in a

Cabinet.

Figure 176

SA Call Server in a Cabinet

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 477 of 484

Figure 177 on page 477

shows a SA Call Server with a Signaling Server in a

Media Gateway.

Figure 177

SA Call Server with SS in a MG

Gateway Controller back Ethernet connections are MGU faceplate ports in a

MG 1010.

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 478 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 178 on page 478 shows a SA Call server with a Signaling Server in a

Cabinet.

Figure 178

SA Call Server with SS in a Cabinet

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 479 of 484

Figure 179 on page 479

shows the supported configuration for a Dual-homed

SA Call Server in an MG 1010 chassis.

Figure 179

Dual-homed SA Call Server in an MG 1010

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 480 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 180 on page 480 shows a Dual-homed HA Call Server with the HSP

in Media Gateways. High Availability is supported with CP PM cards only.

Figure 180

Dual-homed HA Call Server with HSP in Media Gateway

Gateway Controller back Ethernet connections are MGU faceplate ports in a

MG 1010.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 481 of 484

Figure on page 481

shows a Dual-homed HA Call Server with the HSP in

Cabinets.

Dual-homed HA Call Server with HSP in Cabinets

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 482 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Figure 181 on page 482 shows a Dual-homed HA Call Server with a

dual-homed HSP in Media Gateways.

Note: This configuration does not support DSP daughterboards on the

MGC.

Figure 181

Dual-homed HA Call Server with a dual-homed HSP

Gateway Controller back Ethernet connections are MGU faceplate ports in a

MG 1010.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

Page 483 of 484

Figure 182 on page 483 shows a Dual-homed HA Call Server with a

dual-homed HSP in Cabinets.

Note: This configuration does not support DSP daughterboards on the

MGC.

Figure 182

Dual-homed HA Call Server with dual-homed HSP

Communication Server 1000E Installation and Commissioning

Page 484 of 484

Appendix A: Supported cabling options.

NN43041-310 04.06

November 2011

486

Page 485 of 486

Appendix B: Supported media and memory sizes.

The following table lists supported media and memory sizes.

Note: Avaya does not provide technical support for customer provided media.

Table 71

Supported media and memory sizes

Release and Call

Processor

6.0

CP PIV VxWorks CS

CP PM VxWorks CS -

-

USB

RMD

CF

512 MB

512 MB

1 GB

1 GB

CF

FMD

HDD

-

-

RAM

512 MB

1 GB

2 GB 40 GB 2 GB CP PM Linux (Co-Res) -

7.0

CP PIV VxWorks CS

CP PM VxWorks CS -

-

CP PM Linux (Co-Res) *

512 MB

512 MB

1 GB

1 GB

2 GB -

-

512 MB

1 GB

40 GB 2 GB

Installation and Commissioning

Page 486 of 486

Appendix B: Supported media and memory sizes.

Table 71

Supported media and memory sizes

Release and Call

Processor USB

CP DC Linux (Co-Res) 4 GB

RMD

-

CF

CP MG Linux (Co-Res) 4 GB -

-

CF

FMD

HDD

160/250

MB

160/250

MB

* 4 GB USB applies to installation of applications only.

RAM

2 GB

2 GB

NN43041-310 Standard 04.06

October 2011

Avaya Communication Server 1000

Communication Server 1000E

Installation and Commissioning

Copyright © 2004-2011 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing. NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND,

EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of

Nortel Networks.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback

Publication number: NN43041-310

Document release: 04.06

Date: November 2011